JP7283736B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. Regarding.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) are displayed on a variable display device provided in the game area based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole provided in the game area (start winning). ) is started, and when the mode of the plurality of pieces of identification information stopped after the elapse of a predetermined time is a predetermined special result mode, a special result mode in which a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Some are in a game state.
A game machine is known in which a plurality of game states are provided in such a game machine, and the game state to be shifted to differs according to the game state when a special result mode is derived (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
.

JP 2015-2954 A

In a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Patent Document 1, if there is a discrepancy between the game state grasped by the player and the actual game state, there is a risk that the player will be in an unintended state and the interest in the game will be reduced. In particular, in a gaming machine that simultaneously executes two variable display games, transitions between game states are complicated, and there is a high possibility that such a problem will occur. An object of the present invention is to prevent a decline in interest in games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result,
A game control means for controlling a game;
A first start opening and a second start opening forming the start winning opening,
The game control means is
executing a first variable display game as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port;
executing a second variable display game as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port;
The first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed simultaneously,
It is possible to set a specific period that starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
After the end of the specific period, it transitions to a normal game state,
Execution that can be selected in the specific variation display game regardless of whether the specific variation display game, which is a variation display game in which the predetermined end condition is satisfied, is the first variation display game or the second variation display game. The time is shorter than the minimum selectable execution time in the first variable display game that starts when it is not the specific period and becomes the special result,
Further, when the specific variation display game is the first variation display game, the execution time selectable in the first variation display game is the second variation that is started when it is not the specific period and becomes the special result. It is characterized by being shorter than the minimum selectable execution time in the variable display game .

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in a game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the modification of a normal variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of a normal variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a front view of a special variable winning device. It is a top view of a special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a bottom view explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member unit, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the change of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the change of a game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect on a display device; FIG. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the operation of the normal variable winning device and various times. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening-and-closing pattern of a special variable prize-winning device. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure starting port 3 switch processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining fall lottery processing. 9 is a flowchart for explaining support management processing; It is a flow chart explaining jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a fourth specific game state setting process. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a fanfare/interval process transition setting process; It is a flow chart for explaining processing transition setting processing during the special figure 1 small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart for explaining processing transition setting processing during special figure 2 small hit fanfare. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 small hit end processing. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining single-shot command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot system command processing. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern in a 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the production|presentation in a 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the production|presentation in a 2nd modification. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect on the display device in the second modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect on the display device in the second modified example; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the production|presentation in a 2nd modification. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect on the display device in the second modified example; It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state in a 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern in a 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the production|presentation in a 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the production|presentation in a 3rd modification.

<First embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is assembled to a support frame 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is the front frame 1
2 is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the housing. In addition, the front frame (body frame) 1
2, a glass frame 15 (
transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray 21 (
a storage tray), an upper tray ball outlet 22 through which game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full. A storage lower tray (receiving tray) 23, an operation section 24 of the ball shooting device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
At the upper edge of the is a production button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player.
A performance button 25 with built-in is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player.
Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card
etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the batted ball shooting device moves the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game board 30.
It shoots toward the game area 32 on the front. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect etc. that intervened the operation of the player are performed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 8 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0 is provided. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80 . gaming machine 10
is configured to shoot game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting prize opening 36, the stage portion 620
The game ball rolling on the top is likely to enter the first starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 to effect a game effect by operating it. The board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 19) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the right part of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls to these general winning openings 35 is achieved by pressing the winning opening switch 35a provided in the general winning opening 35.
(see FIG. 19).

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning port 36 (first start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). . The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 19)
detected by In addition, in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40, there is a second start winning opening 97 (second
start winning area) is provided. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 19).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 , a normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided between the normal pattern start gate 34 and the second start prize winning port 97 . In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory (first start memory ) are stored. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning opening of the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric winning opening 37d)
Is the first start winning area that provides the conditions for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). Then, the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the starting port 2 switch 37
a (see FIG. 19), and when the game ball is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 immediately executes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 1
Memorize the start winning memory. Thus, in this embodiment, the general electric power winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (starting opening of special figure 1), and the second starting winning opening 97 corresponds to the second
It corresponds to the starting winning area (starting opening of special figure 2).

A game control device (game control means) 100 controls a movable member 37b of a normal fluctuation winning device 37 between an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of a normal pattern fluctuation display game. (conversion control means) (see FIG. 19). Ordinary fluctuation winning device 37
Although the details of the configuration will be described later, in this embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is advanced and retreated (slid) in the front and rear direction by the normal electric solenoid 37c.
It is a so-called tongue type ordinary electric accessory that opens the general electric winning prize port 37d (puts a state in which the game ball can flow into the general electric winning prize port 37d). As the movable member 37b of the normal variable prize winning device 37, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that opens the normal electric prize opening 37d by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward by a normal electric solenoid 37c is provided. may Game control device 10
0 is an open state in which the movable member 37b is opened via the general electric solenoid 37c and game balls can flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. change to

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual. A time-saving state (general electric support (electricity support) state) is generated by making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the game state.

A special variable winning device 38 is provided in the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40 . As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, the special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d into a state in which game balls can flow in by sliding the opening/closing member 990 forward and backward. The special variable winning device 38 converts the closed state of the large winning opening 38d to the open state according to the result of the special variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening 38d. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is awarded to the player. Special variable winning device 38
A winning game ball is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 19).

That is, the special variable winning device 38 of the present embodiment opens and closes from a closed state in which the opening/closing member 990 closes the big winning opening 38d (closed state disadvantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. The member 990 is retracted and converted to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) capable of receiving game balls flowing down the game area 32 . And special variable winning device 3
8, the game ball is guided obliquely backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992, and guided obliquely forward by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964. to the left. As a result, the front wall projecting portion 954 and the rear wall projecting portion 96 are formed in the downstream passage 38f.
4. The opening and closing member 9 is more effective than the case where the protrusion 992 and the recess 993 flow straight down without undulations.
The time that the game ball stays on the 90 becomes longer. Therefore, the game ball always exists on the opening and closing member 990, and even if the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, the opening and closing member 99
To give a player a sense of expectation for winning even if the opening is short, because the game balls existing on an opening/closing member 990 are likely to drop and enter a large winning opening 38d when the door 90 is opened. can be done.

In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening and closing member 990 bounces by coming into contact with the projecting portion 992 and is guided away from the big winning opening 38d. In addition, the bouncing game ball can reach the front wall protruding portion 954 of the channel front wall 952 or the rear wall protruding portion 964 of the channel rear wall 962 .
The player may further move away from the big prize winning opening 38d by contacting with, for example. In addition, since the projecting portions 992 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the game balls may fall through this interval without coming into contact with the projecting portions 992 . By providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964 in this manner, the game ball rolls in a variety of ways when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, and the amusement of the game can be improved. can. Also, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the opening/closing member 9
The inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the 90 into the big winning opening 38d can be shifted, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the big winning opening 38d can be prevented. The configuration for retaining game balls in the normal variable winning device 37, which will be described later, may be used as the configuration for retaining game balls in the special variable winning device 38, or conversely, the game balls in the special variable winning device 38 may be used. may be used as a configuration for retaining game balls in the normal variable prize winning device 37 .

Returning to FIG. 2, in the game area 32 below the first starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win a winning opening is provided. In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80, special figure fluctuation display games (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2
A batch display device 50 is provided for executing a variable display game) and a normal pattern variable display game.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) etc.
Consists of a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) 51 for the variation display game and a special figure 2 indicator (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for the special figure 2 variation display game, and an LED lamp It is provided with a storage display unit 53 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variable display game.

The collective display device 50 also has a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big win (the number of openings and closings of the special variable prize winning device 38), and a method of beating that is advantageous to the player, either left-handed (normally) or right-handed. A first game state display section 56 for notifying (playing method corresponding to the game state) and a probability display section 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a probability state display unit for displaying that the probability state of the big win is high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a display that lights up when the big win occurs to notify the occurrence of the big win. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.

In addition, a normal pattern display unit 58 that displays the normal pattern fluctuation display game, a memory display unit 59 for notifying the number of starting memories of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the time saving state occurrence A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the display device 41 is performing the decoration special figure variation display game, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, in addition to the central segment, the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segments is also blinked. To display that it is fluctuating, special figure 1
and special figure 2 are configured to be distinguishable. Then, when the result of the game is "losing", for example, the center segment (if it is a special figure 1, the 8th segment on the lower right side) is lit as a result of losing, and the result of the game is In the case of a "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the win (special result mode).

The memory display unit 53 is the first start winning port 36, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51, and the number of undigested balls among the number of winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting memory number = pending number) multiple LE
It is indicated by turning off or lighting on (blinking) D. The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when the special game state is not in progress, all the LEDs are turned off, and in the special game state, the LEDs are turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. turn it on. The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 turns off all the LEDs when, for example, the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting), and the right-handed hitting is more effective than the left-handed hitting. When the game state is more advantageous for the player (at the time of hitting to the right), all the LEDs are turned on. The probability display unit 57 turns off all the LEDs when the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), and turns off all the LEDs when the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (variable probability state).
Turn on the ED.

FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 30 included in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 forming a front portion of the center case 40, and a rear portion of the center case 40, and a game board. and a rear structural member 700 to which various members necessary for the board 30 are attached. The rear structural member 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess opening forward, and inside the recess is a board effect device 44 that performs game effects by operating. , Various movable accessory units are provided.

The front structural member 600 includes the general winning opening 35, the warp flow path forming member 614, the stage section 6
20, etc. are provided. In addition to the front constituent member 600, the game board main body 80 includes a normal figure starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a first starting winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 97, a normal variable winning device 37, a special variable A winning device 38, a collective display device 50, and the like are provided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, on the right side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, a downflow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is formed. A game ball failing in (specifically, a game ball that did not win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37 even though it reached the normal variable prize winning device 37) flows downward through the downflow path 615.例文帳に追加A guiding portion 616 is provided below the flow-down passage 615 . The guiding portion 616 has an upper surface 617
is an inclined surface that descends to the left, and the game ball flowing down the downflow path 615 is received by the upper surface 617 and guided to the left where the second start winning opening 97 and the special variable winning device 38 exist. It has become.

[Normal Variable Winning Device]
Next, an example of the configuration of the normal variable winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 12. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the normal variable winning device 37. As shown in FIG. 5(a) is a top view of the normal variable winning device 37 with the movable member 37b closed, and FIG. 5(b) is a top view of the movable member 3
7b is a top view of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in an open state. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the normal variable winning device 37 includes a channel rear wall 373a arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and a channel front wall 371a arranged in front of the channel rear wall 373a. It is provided with a downflow path 37f sandwiched between and in which game balls can flow down in a line. The downflow path 37f is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front side, so that the game balls flow down rightward in a line. In addition, the normal variable winning device 37 has a
A substantially U-shaped detour 37g through which game balls can pass in a line is provided. As shown in FIG. 4, an inlet 37g1 (one end of the detour 37g) and an outlet 37g2 (the other end of the detour 37g) of the detour 37g are formed in the flow path rear wall 373a, and the game ball flows into the detour 37g from the downflow path 37f one by one through the inlet 37g1, and enters the detour 3 one by one through the outlet 37g2.
7g flows into the downflow path 37f.

As shown in FIG. 4, the channel front wall 371a has a protruding portion 371b that protrudes rearward and penetrates the channel rear wall 373a. The protruding portion 371b is located between the entrance 37g1 and the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g at a position where the game balls flowing down the downflow path 37f collide. Therefore, the projecting portion 371b prevents the game ball from flowing down the downflow path 37f on the way (that is, before it flows into the end point (downstream end) of the downflow path 37f), thereby allowing the game ball to enter the detour 37g. It is designed to induce And, since the protruding portion 371b is provided in the middle of the downflow path 37f, the game ball must pass through the detour 37g.
Cannot flow to the endpoint of f.

As shown in FIG. 5, the bottom surface of the central portion and the right end portion of the downflow passage 37f and the bottom surface of the bypass passage 37g are formed by a movable member 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction. movable member 37
b protrudes forward as shown in FIG.
), which is a state in which game balls cannot win, and an open state, which is a state in which game balls can win in the general electric prize opening 37d after retreating backward as shown in FIG. 5(b). It's becoming
That is, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b and cannot flow into the general electricity winning opening 37d, and the movable member 37b is in the open state. In the case of , it is possible to flow into the general electric prize winning opening 37d.

Specifically, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. That is, it flows down the downflow path 37f to the projection 371b, collides with the projection 371b, and flows into the detour 37g. In addition, when the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the projecting portion 371b, or when the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f flows into the upper surface of the movable member 37b When the movable member 37b is in the open state when the
Flow into 7d.

In addition, the game ball that passed through the detour 37g and flowed into the end point of the downflow path 37f
When b is in the open state, it flows into the general electrical winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and flowed into the end point of the downflow path 37f does not flow into the normal electric winning opening 37d, and the normal variable winning device 37 Advance to the outside, for example, the downflow path 6
15 to guide 616 . That is, the game ball is the normal variable winning device 37
It corresponds to a game ball that failed to win a prize (a game ball that did not win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37 even though it arrived at the normal variable prize winning device 37). In addition, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the flow path front wall 371a, but the gap is such that game balls cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 4, the normal variable winning device 37 includes a starting port 2 switch 37a and a movable member 3
7b and a movable member unit 374 having a common solenoid 37c. Furthermore, the normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a front decoration member 371 having a channel front wall 371a and a channel rear wall 373a.
and a rear base member 37 to which the movable member 37b and the like are attached.
5, a rear cover member 377 that covers the rear surface of the rear base member 375, a front LED substrate 372a, and a front substrate holder 3 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a to the rear surface of the front decoration member 371.
72 , a rear LED board 376 a and a rear board holder 376 for fixing the rear LED board 376 a to the rear surface of the rear base member 375 .

At least the front decoration member 371, the front base member 373, and the rear base member 375 are made of a material that can transmit light. A front LED board 372 is mounted behind the front decoration member 371 as decoration means.
a is arranged, and a rear LED board 376a is arranged behind the rear base member 375 as a decoration means, and it is possible to decorate the normal variable winning device 37 with light.

The front decoration member 371 has a plate-shaped front surface portion 371c. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that game balls are prevented from flowing down in front of this front surface. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is visible to the player and is decorated. Moreover, the upper part of the plate-like front part 371c is
A channel front wall 371a forms a side wall on the front side of the downstream channel 37f.

As shown in FIG. 5, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) upstream front wall protrusions 371d protruding rearward are provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. This upstream front wall protrusion 371
d is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion with sloping left and right side surfaces. This upstream front wall protrusion 371d
has a function of guiding backward the game ball flowing rightward in order to suppress the power of the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f by meandering the game ball. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a downstream front wall protrusion 371e that protrudes rearward is provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The downstream front wall projection 371e is a triangular prism-shaped projection with slanted left and right side surfaces. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e has a function of guiding backward the game ball flowing rightward in order to make the game ball flowing into the end point of the downflow passage 37f meander and suppress the power of the game. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f. Furthermore, the downstream front wall protrusion 371e allows game balls that flow down around the normal variable winning device 37 (outside the normal variable winning device 37) to enter the normal variable winning device 37 on the downstream side (flow path 37f). end point side).

FIG. 6(a) is a back view of the front decoration member 371. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the rear surface side of the front decoration member 371 is a rib-shaped extension wall 3 extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front surface portion 371c.
71f are provided. The extension wall 371f has a different function depending on the place where it is provided, and is located on the bottom surface of the downflow passage 37f (specifically, the starting point (upstream end) of the downflow passage 37f).
bottom surface), a general electric prize-winning opening forming portion 371f2 that forms the side wall and the bottom surface of the general electric prize-winning opening 37d, and a guiding flow path 37e that guides a game ball that has won the general electric prize-winning opening 37d. A flow path forming portion 371f3, a switch mounting portion forming portion 371f4 forming a mounting portion for mounting the starting port 2 switch 37a, and a surrounding wall 371f5 for preventing game balls flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 from entering into the inside. have a function.

A bottom surface portion 371f1 that forms the bottom surface of the downflow passage 37f is an inclined surface that inclines leftward when viewed from the rear surface side. The general electric winning prize opening formation portion 371f2 is inclined so as to collect the game balls that have flowed into the general electric winning prize opening 37d to the guide flow path 37e. Game balls can flow into the guide channel 37e in a row, and a starting port 2 switch 37a is provided at the inflow portion to the guide channel 37e. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the general electric winning prize port 37d are detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a and then flow into the induction flow path 37e. The guide flow path 37e formed by the guide flow path forming portion 371f3 is a flow path that guides the game ball from the general electric prize opening 37d to the rear surface side of the game board 30, and the game ball is placed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 371c. Rib 371g for guiding backward
is formed.

The front LED board 372a and the front board holder 372 are disposed on the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 inside the peripheral wall 371f5 (the portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5). A portion of the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5 is processed to scatter light (uneven processing in the example shown in FIG. 6A). As a result, the previous LE
The light from the D board 372a and the rear LED board 376a can effectively decorate the normal variable winning device 37, and the front LED board 372a itself, the front board holder 372, etc. can be positioned in front of the front decoration member 371. It is difficult to see through the front decoration member 371 from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 6(b), a front LE is provided at the lower portion of the front base member 373.
A plurality of holes (seven in the example shown in FIG. 6B) are provided for releasing heat from the D board 372a and the like. These holes are also difficult to see from the front of the front decoration member 371 due to the light scattering processing applied to the front decoration member 371 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the front base member 373 has a plate-like rear surface portion 373b. A front decoration member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b.
The part of the front surface of 3b that is not covered by the front decoration member 371 is decorated. Rear part 3
The upper part of 73b serves as a channel rear wall 373a forming a rear side wall of the downstream channel 37f. A movable member inserting portion 373c is formed at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a so as to pass through the front base member 373 from the rear surface side of the movable member 37b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front side of the front base member 373 is provided with a plurality of (two in this embodiment) rear wall projections 373d projecting forward. The rear wall projections 373d are triangular prism-shaped projections with slanted left and right side surfaces. It is provided so as to be positioned slightly downstream with respect to the protrusion 371d. The rear wall protrusion 373d is the downstream passage 37f
In order to make the game ball flowing down meander and suppress the power of the ball, it has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right forward. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f.

FIG. 6(b) is a back view of the front base member 373. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6(b), in a central portion of the rear surface portion 373b and facing the portion where the guide flow path 37e is formed in the front decoration member 371, the guide flow path 37e is formed on the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b. A penetrating portion 373e that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed so as to communicate on the side. Further, as shown in FIG. 6(b), on the rear surface side of the front base member 373, a plurality of rib-shaped extension walls 373f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b are provided. The extension wall 373f has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and functions as a guide channel forming portion 373f1 that forms the guide channel 37e and a peripheral wall 373f2 that forms the periphery of the normal variable winning device 37. have.

Guidance channel formation part 373f1 forms guidance channel 37e so that a game ball which flowed into penetration part 373e may be guided back. In addition, a rib 373g for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the lower end of the guide channel forming portion 373f1. The lower end portion of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed at the lower end portion have an upper surface that slopes backward, and the game ball that has flowed into the through portion 373e is received by these upper surfaces and is moved backward. It is designed to guide you to The guided game balls flow into a discharge channel for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine 10.例文帳に追加

The surrounding wall 373f2 is formed in accordance with the shape of a penetrating portion penetrating back and forth formed in a portion of the game board body 80 where the normal variable winning device 37 is attached, and the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board body 80. At this time, the peripheral wall 373f2 is inserted into the through portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the surrounding wall 373f2 comes into contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear base member 375 has a peripheral wall 375a that coincides with the peripheral wall 373f2 of the front base member 373 in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a pair of guides for guiding and supporting the movable member 37b that moves in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the movable member insertion portion 373c formed in the front base member 373 of the rear base member 375. As shown in FIG. is provided with a movable member holding portion 375b. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are arranged with a predetermined interval (gap 375c) therebetween, and are capable of coming into contact with the lower surface of the movable member 37b and capable of guiding and supporting the movable member 37b. is provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the front side of the rear base member 375, a movable member unit 374 including the movable member 37b and an operating mechanism (driving mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached. The movable member unit 374 includes a movable member 37b capable of sliding in the front-rear direction, a common solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a for transmitting the driving force from the common solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. and crank 374b
and

The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 5(a) and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted rearward as shown in FIG. 5(b). It is convertible. In addition, the movable member 37b can appear above the electric prize opening 37d through a movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and a movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. there is

FIG. 7(a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374, and FIG. 7(b) is a front view of the movable member 37b. 8A is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG.
) is a bottom view of the movable member 37b. As shown in FIG. 7A, the movable member 37b includes an upper step portion 37b1, a first middle step portion 37b2 provided at a position lower than the upper step portion 37b1, and a position lower than the first middle step portion 37b2. The provided second middle step portion 37b3 and the second
A lower stepped portion 37b4 provided at a position lower than the middle stepped portion 37b3 forms a stepped shape aligned in the left-right direction. The upper part 37b1, the first middle part 37b2, the second middle part 37b3, and the lower part 37b4 are arranged in this order so that the upper part 37b1 is arranged on the leftmost side and the lower part 37b4 is arranged on the rightmost side. The ball is designed to flow down from left to right.

The upper stage portion 37b1 has a front end portion that extends upward from the normal power winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and serves as a flow-down passage forming portion that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down passage 37f. Upper part 37b1
is one step lower than the portion other than the flow passage forming portion of the upper step portion 37b1. In addition, from the right end of the portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 other than the flow passage forming portion, the lower wall projecting portion 37b5
extends forward. The lower wall projecting portion 37b5 has an inclined left side surface,
The width (the length in the front-rear direction) of the flow-down passage forming portion is provided so as to be gradually narrowed. The lower wall protruding portion 37b5 has a function of guiding forward the game ball flowing down to the right in order to suppress the power of the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f by meandering the game ball. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f.

A front end portion of the first intermediate stage portion 37b2, which extends upward from the ordinary power winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, serves as a downstream passage forming portion forming a bottom surface of the downstream passage 37f. The portion other than the portion (that is, the portion other than the flow-down passage forming portion) serves as the detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. A boundary portion between the flow-down passage forming portion and the detour forming portion of the first intermediate stage portion 37b2 is arranged directly below the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The first intermediate step portion 37b2 is inclined such that the rear end is positioned lower than the front end. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the game ball rolls easily from the front side to the rear side in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. A meandering left rib portion 37b6 is formed on the upper surface of the first intermediate step portion 37b2 to protrude upward and extend in the front-rear direction. As a result, the game ball rolling on the detour 37g meanders and the power of the ball can be suppressed.

The second middle stage portion 37b3 has a front end portion extending upward from the normal electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state.
71b.

When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the lower part 37b4 has a front end portion that extends upward from the normal power winning opening 37d so that the bottom surface of the downflow path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface at the end point of the downflow path 37f). A portion other than the front end portion (that is, a portion other than the flow-down passage forming portion) serves as a detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the lower part 37b4,
A boundary portion between the flow-down passage forming portion and the detour forming portion is arranged directly below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The lower stepped portion 37b4 is inclined so that the rear end is positioned higher than the front end, and the rear end portion is flush with the rear end portion of the first intermediate stepped portion 37b2. As a result, for example, FIG.
As shown in a), the game ball rolls easily from the rear side to the front side in the downstream portion of the detour 37g. The rear end portion of the lower step portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end portion of the first intermediate step portion 37b2. A meandering right rib portion 37b7 that protrudes upward and extends in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper surface of the lower step portion 37b4. As a result, the game ball rolling on the detour 37g meanders and the power of the ball can be suppressed.

Thus, the movable member 37b is provided with raised portions such as the lower wall projecting portion 37b5, the left projecting portion 37b6, and the right projecting portion 37b7. Further, the front decoration member 371 is provided with a raised portion such as an upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with a raised portion such as a rear wall protrusion 373d. . With such a raised portion, the movable member 37b
A game ball stays on it for a long time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6(b), downwardly extending sliding portions 37b8 are formed at the left and right ends of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed to extend in the front-rear direction, and contacts the upper surfaces of a pair of holding portions 373h formed on the front base member 373, thereby moving the movable member 37b on the holding portions 373h. It becomes slidable.

As shown in FIGS. 7B and 8B, a connecting pin 37b9 protruding downward is provided in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 7(a), a crank (drive arm) 374b for transmitting the driving force from the common solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b
A through portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted is formed in the through portion 374b1.
The movable member 37b and the crank 374b are connected by inserting the tip (lower end) of the connection pin 37b9 into b1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7B and 8B, in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b, the front and rear sides of the connection pin 37b9 project downward and extend along the front-rear direction. A guide rib 37b10 is provided. The guide rib 37b10 is formed by a gap 373i (see FIG. 6B) formed along the front-rear direction between a pair of holding portions 373h of the front base member 373, or a pair of movable members of the rear base member 375. It can be inserted into a gap 375c (see FIG. 4) formed along the front-rear direction between the holding portions 375b. These gaps 373i,3
By inserting the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b into 75c from above, the movable member 37
It is possible to guide the linear movement (sliding movement) in the front-rear direction of b. That is, since the guide ribs 37b10 of the movable member 37b are fitted into the gaps 373i of the front base member 373 and the gaps 375c of the rear base member 375, the lateral movement of the movable member 37b is restricted.
Movement of the movable member 37b can be limited to movement in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), a crank 374b that transmits the driving force from the general electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member, and one end of the crank 374b has a connecting pin 37b9 of the movable member 37b. A penetrating portion 374b1 that can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b2 is formed at the other end. A slider 374a that transmits the driving force from the general electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b has a concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted.
is formed, and the protrusion 374b2 is inserted into the recess 374a1 so that the slider 374
a and the crank 374b are connected. A rotating shaft 374b3 extending in the vertical direction is formed at the bent portion of the crank 374b.
is rotatable around the center. The rotating shaft 374b3 is sandwiched between the rear base member 375 from above and below and is rotatably held.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the slider 374a is a plate-like main body 3 perpendicular to the vertical direction.
74a2, a left wall portion 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body portion 374a2 and perpendicular to the main body portion 374a2, a front wall portion 374a4 connected to the front end of the main body portion 374a2 and perpendicular to the main body portion 374a2, and from the front wall portion 374a4 and a protruding piece 374a5 protruding forward. A concave portion 374a1 into which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is
4a2.

The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the common solenoid 37c, and the drive shaft 37c1 of the slider 374a extends (in this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right). Then, it is pushed by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the right, and when the drive shaft 37c1 retracts (in this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left), it is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the left. do.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), the rear surface side of the front base member 373 is provided with a recessed portion 373j extending along the left-right direction. The protruding piece 3 of the slider 374a is located in the recessed portion 373j.
74a5 can be inserted, and by inserting the projecting piece 374a5 into the recessed portion 373j from behind, it is possible to guide the linear movement (sliding movement) of the slider 374a in the horizontal direction. Further, the front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a
3j, the front base member 37
abuts on the rear surface of 3; As a result, the front and rear positions of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 are set to predetermined front and rear positions.

When the movable member 37b is to be changed from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the common solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 extends, the slider 374a slides to the right, and the crank 374b rotates about the rotation shaft 374b3 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from above, so that the connection pin 983a faces forward. , and the movable member 37b protrudes forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is closed (the state shown in FIG. 5(a)), and the winning of the game ball to the general electrical winning opening 37d is disabled.

On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is to be changed from the closed state to the open state, the normal solenoid 37
The drive shaft 37c1 of c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 retracts, the slider 374a slides to the left, and the crank 374b rotates around the rotation shaft 374b3 in the clockwise direction when viewed from above, so that the connection pin 37b9 faces rearward. moving and the movable member 37
b retreats backward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in an open state (the state shown in FIG. 5(b)), and the winning of the game ball to the general electrical winning opening 37d becomes possible.

9 to 12 show rolling modes of game balls in the normal variable winning device 37. FIG. 9 to 12, illustration of some members is omitted for the sake of explanation. A game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 (a game ball that has flowed into the starting point of the downflow path 37f) is first guided obliquely rearward by the upstream front wall projection 371d located upstream, and then upstream. is guided obliquely forward by the rear wall protrusion 373d located at the upper step portion 37b of the movable member 37b.
It flows into the front end portion of 1.

The game ball that has flowed into the upper step portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b is guided obliquely rearward by the upstream front wall projection 371d located downstream, and then the rear wall projection 373 located downstream.
d and the lower wall projecting portion 37b5 of the movable member 37b, the movable member 37
b flows into the front end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2. That is, the game ball flows down the downflow path 37f while meandering back and forth. As a result, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b more than when the downflow path 37f does not have a lower wall protrusion 37b5, an upstream front wall protrusion 371d, a rear wall protrusion 373d, or the like, and flows straight down. it takes longer.

The game ball that has flowed into the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the projecting portion 371b,
Guided rearward by the protruding portion 371b and the first intermediate stage portion 37b2 that slopes downward to the rear, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, inside the rear base member 375, there are a first guide piece 375d for guiding the game ball rolling in the detour 37g from the first middle section 37b2 to the lower section 37b4, and a lower section 37b4. A second guide piece 375e is provided to guide the top from the rear side to the front side. The game ball rolls on the first middle step portion 37b2 as shown in FIG.
11, it is guided to the right by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. 11 and flows into the lower step portion 37b4.

As shown in FIG. 12, the game ball that has flowed into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b is guided forward by the second guide piece 375e and the lower portion 37b4 that is downwardly inclined forward, and is shown in FIG.
b), from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g to the end point of the downflow passage 37f (lower stage 37b
4). Here, the meandering left rib portion 37b6 is formed on the first intermediate step portion 37b2.
is formed, the game ball rolls backward on the upstream part of the detour 37g while meandering left and right. In addition, since the meandering right rib portion 37b7 is formed in the lower portion 37b4, the game ball rolls forward on the downstream portion of the detour 37g while meandering left and right.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the front base member 373 has a partition wall 373k that separates the upstream and downstream portions of the detour 37g.
An intermediate projecting portion 373k1 is formed in a portion corresponding to the upstream portion of the . Therefore, while the game ball is rolling on the upstream part of the detour 37g (that is, on the first middle part 37b2), it collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces, and is pushed back to the entrance 37g1 side. be As a result, the left protruding portion 37b6, the right protruding portion 37b7, and the intermediate protruding portion 373 are formed in the detour 37g.
The game ball stays on the movable member 37b for a longer time than when it rolls linearly without a starting part such as k1.

In this way, the downstream passage 37f is provided with starting portions such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d.
6, the right protrusion 37b7, the intermediate protrusion 373k1, etc. are provided, the time for which the game ball stays on the movable member 37b becomes longer. In addition, by providing these starting portions, the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b can be rolled in a variety of ways, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. In addition, by providing these raised portions, the movable member 3 can be moved when the movable member 37b is opened.
It is possible to shift the flow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on 7b into the general electric prize winning opening 37d, and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the general electric prize winning opening 37d.

The game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 flows down the downflow path 37f, and first moves to the movable member 3.
It flows into the upper step portion 37b1 of 7b. When the game ball flows into the upper part 37b1, the movable member 37
When b is in the open state, the game ball does not pass through the detour 37g
flow into On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1 and the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the downflow path 37f toward the projecting portion 371b. and,
When the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball collides with the protruding portion 371b, the game ball flows into the electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b does not open before the game ball collides with the projecting portion 371b, the game ball collides with the projecting portion 371b and heads for the detour 37g.

Even if the movable member 37b is opened while the game ball is rolling in the detour 37g,
Even if the movable member 37b does not open while the game ball is rolling in the detour 37g, the game ball continues to roll in the detour 37g and heads for the exit 37g2. Then, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, and the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electrical winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, and the normal variable winning device 37 advance to the outside (game area 32) of
It becomes a game ball that fails to win a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37.例文帳に追加

Here, an intermediate protrusion 373k1 (see FIG. 6) formed on the partition wall 373k of the front base member 373
(b) reference) not only has the function of lengthening the retention time of the game ball on the movable member 37b by making the game ball meander, but also the function of the movable member while the game ball is rolling on the detour 37g It also has a function to ensure a sufficient residence time even when 37b is operated (moved back and forth). For example, the movable member 3
When 7b is converted to the open state, the game ball, due to frictional resistance with the movable member 37b, contact with the right ridge portion 37b7, etc., moves to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream portion of the detour 37g. Therefore, the residence time of the game ball staying on the movable member 37b is longer than when the movable member 37b does not change the state while the game ball is rolling in the downstream part of the detour 37g. Become.

On the other hand, for example, when the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the upstream part of the detour 37g (that is, on the first middle part 37b2), the game ball is movable Due to frictional resistance with the member 37b, contact with the left protrusion 37b6, etc., it is pulled backward (downstream) in the upstream part of the detour 37g, so the game ball rolls the upstream part of the detour 37g. The staying time of the game ball staying on the movable member 37b becomes shorter than when the movable member 37b does not change the state while it is moving. On the other hand, since the normal variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment is provided with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 in the upstream part of the detour 37g, the game ball moves to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream part of the detour 37g. When it is pulled in, it collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces. That is, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 while being drawn to the downstream side, and is once pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream part of the detour 37g, so that the game ball is upstream of the detour 37g. Even if the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while rolling on the part, it is possible to secure a sufficient residence time of the game ball on the movable member 37b.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the gaming area 3 on the front side where the gaming balls can flow down.
2 is formed, and a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37 in the case of this embodiment) provided in the game area 32, wherein the variable winning device is A mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device to the game board main body 80, and a winning area where game balls flowing down the game area 32 can win (in the case of this embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d)
, an opening/closing member (movable member 37b) that can be converted to a closed state that closes the winning area and an open state that opens the winning area, a flow path (downflow path 37f) in which game balls can roll, and a game ball to stay. A retention area (detour 37g) for letting the flow pass, and a guide section (protrusion 371b) for guiding the game ball rolling (flowing down) in the flow path to the retention area. The flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall portion by the opening/closing member in the closed state, and when the opening/closing member is in the open state, the flow path is formed when the opening/closing member is in the closed state. The game ball is configured to enter the winning area through the space, and the retention area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall regardless of the state of the opening and closing member, and has a plurality of communication ports communicating with the flow path. , the game ball guided by the guiding part and flowing in from the flow path through one of the plurality of communication ports (inlet 37g1), and the one communication port of the plurality of communication ports is configured to be able to flow out to the channel through a different communication port (outlet 37g2).

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a game board main body 80 in which a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable prize winning device (this embodiment) provided in the game area 32 In the case of , the gaming machine includes a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80, and a game area 3
A winning area (general electric winning opening 37d) where a game ball flowing down 2 can win a prize, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or cannot win a prize in the winning area by sliding back and forth, and a game ball in the winning area. A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted to an open state in which a game ball can roll, a first flow path (downflow path 37f) and a second flow path (detour path 37g) in which a game ball can roll, and a first A guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides a game ball rolling (flowing down) in the flow path to the second flow path is provided. The first flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall portion by the slide member when the slide member is in the closed state, and when the slide member is in the open state, the first flow path is formed in the closed state. In some cases, the game ball is configured to enter the winning area via the space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is formed by the slide member regardless of the state of the slide member. It is formed on the rear surface side and both ends thereof are communication ports communicating with the first flow channel, and are guided by the guide portion and flowed from the first flow channel through one of the communication ports (inlet 37g1) of the both ends. The game ball is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path through the other communication port (outlet 37g2) of the two ends.

That is, the normal variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a detour 37g (retention area, second flow path) is added to the downflow path 37f (flow path, first flow path). By adding the detour 37g in this way, the residence time of the game ball staying on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening/closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when there is no detour 37g. Therefore, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the winning opening (in the case of this embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d), and the reduction of the game ball during the predetermined game state (in the case of this embodiment, the time saving state) can be suppressed. is possible, the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the normal variable winning device 37 having the game ball retention function is arranged in the right game area (the area on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32), the player can easily catch the game balls in the right game area. You can enjoy the rolling mode. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the front decoration member 371 is made of a material that allows light to pass through, and the normal variable winning device 3
Since the rolling manner of the game ball within 7 is also sufficiently visible, the rolling manner of the game ball in the right game area can be enjoyed more.

The variable winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the normal variable winning device 37, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special variable winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, the variable winning device is, for example, a detour 37g (retention area, second channel) added to the downflow channel 38f (channel, first channel) of the special variable winning device 38. may Further, the opening/closing member that can be converted between the closed state in which the prize opening is closed and the open state in which the prize opening is opened is not limited to the slide member.
It can be changed as appropriate. In the case of this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, a slide member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by sliding back and forth is used as an opening/closing member.
However, the opening/closing member is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 13(b), a rotating member (movable member 37b ).

Moreover, the retention area for retaining the game ball is not limited to the detour 37g (second flow path), and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the retention area is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not separated, that is, a space obtained by removing the partition wall 373k separating the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g from the detour 37g. , from the detour 37g to the front end portion (
It may be a space obtained by removing portions other than the portion separating the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the game ball flows from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through one of the communication ports (inlet 37g1) is It is higher than the rate at which the game ball flows from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2), and the slide member (movable member 37b) has one communication It is possible to provide a height difference (in the case of this embodiment, a step or an inclination) such that the port is arranged at a higher position than the other communication port. By configuring in this way, since the game ball can smoothly roll in the first flow path (downflow path 37f) and the second flow path (detour path 37g), the first flow path and the second flow path It is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first flow path (
downflow path 37f) or second flow path (detour 37g) for suppressing the power of the game ball rolling (in the case of this embodiment, the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the left protrusion 37b6, the right Ridge portion 37
b7) can be provided. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to further extend the residence time in which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b), a predetermined game state (in the case of this embodiment, a time saving state ), it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls in the game, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the pitch suppressing portion, the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, the rear wall protrusion 373d, and the like are provided in the downstream passage 37f, and the detour 37g is provided. Although the raised portions (convex portions) such as the left rib portion 37b6, the right rib portion 37b7, and the intermediate projection portion 373k1 are provided in the upper portion, the pitch suppressing portion is not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, you may provide a lower part (recessed part) in 37 f of flow-down paths, and 37 g of detours as a pitch suppression part. Specifically, for example, a meandering groove may be formed on the upper surface of the movable member 37b as a lower part, and the game ball may roll while meandering along the groove. In addition, as a ball power suppression part, the downflow path 37
undulations (both undulations and undulations) may be provided in f and the detour 37g so that the game ball rolls while meandering due to the undulations. In addition, the ball power suppressing part is the raised part (convex part) and the lower part (
recesses), and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game area 32 is provided with a retention device (
In addition to the normal variable prize winning device 37), there are provided members for suppressing the power of the ball (obstacle nail, windmill, downflow path 615, guide section 616, etc.), that is, retention members having a game ball retention function. Therefore, since the game ball can be retained in the right game area by the retention device and the retention member, it is possible to enjoy the rolling aspect of the game ball in the right game area. In addition, there are methods to retain game balls by providing unevenness on the surface, methods to retain game balls by using materials with a high coefficient of friction, and methods to perform certain movements with the driving force of a drive source (solenoid, etc.). A game ball retention function may be imparted to a predetermined member or device by a method of retaining balls, a method of retaining game balls by providing a sorting device, or the like.

In addition, since the normal variable winning device 37 can retain the game ball in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10 by the starting part and the detour 37g, a retaining member (a retaining device other than the normal variable winning device 37) may be used. ) is preferably configured so that game balls can be retained in directions other than the front-rear direction (horizontal direction and vertical direction of the gaming machine 10). Thereby, the retention member (and/or
Or a staying device other than the normal variable winning device 37) and the normal variable winning device 37 make it possible to make the game machine stay three-dimensionally, so that the staying time can be earned and the game ball rolls. Increased interest in movement.

In addition, in the middle of the detour 37g, there are outlets 30c, general prize-winning outlets 35, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "outlet 3
0c etc." ) may be provided. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to whether or not the game ball that has failed to enter the normal variable winning device 37 comes out of the normal variable winning device 37, and the amusement is improved and the balls are delivered. To adjust the rate so that it does not become too large,
It is possible to prevent ball clogging in the detour 37g.

Further, when the out-port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the detour 37g, game balls may flow into the out-port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, FIG.
4, when the movable member 37b of the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the detour 3
A through hole 37b11 is provided in a portion forming 7g. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (or closed state), the vertical positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c are aligned (the through hole 37b11 is positioned directly above the out port 30c). ), movable member 37b
When the upper game ball can flow into the out port 30c and the movable member 37b is in a closed state (or may be in an open state), the vertical positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c are aligned. However, it is also possible to configure such that the game ball on the movable member 37b cannot flow into the out port 30c or is difficult to flow into the out port 30c (the through hole 37b11 is displaced from directly above the out port 30c).

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer called an amusement chip (IC).
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operation clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, D
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as C5V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-power supply that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V, DC 5V from the voltage of DC 32V, and the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 When the power failure occurs, the power supply voltage is supplied. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And, it has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100
1 (especially the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same A state that has become identification information,
However, excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-reach effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining the winning of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random number generation for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A
constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, and a normal variable winning device 37.
Inside the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning port 97, the winning port switch 35a, a plurality of (1 to x, 2 in this embodiment) arranged in the special variable winning device 38 1) It is connected to the big winning opening switch 38a and the gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, and a negative logic signal such as 11V high level and 7V low level supplied from these switches is input, and 0V- An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that converts to a 5V positive logic signal is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, the proximity I/F1
21, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. be. Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
A detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like,
0, the detection signal of the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like, the game machine 10
A detection signal of a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 or the like is also inputted. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is
0 to a trial-firing test apparatus (not shown) through a relay board 70. FIG.
Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
a and the detection signal of the starting port 3 switch 97a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. FIG.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . The reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, by the game machine controlling the game. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and has a large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a general electric solenoid 3 for opening the normal variable winning device 37.
A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the open/close data of 7c. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c that are output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 1 for outputting on/off drive signals for the segment lines on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138 d is provided for outputting an external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 .

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning port 97 The switch 97a, the winning slot switch 35a, the big winning slot switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are provided with coils for detecting magnetic fields. type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are
Microswitches with mechanical contacts can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be restored even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding data and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 forming a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decorative lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, etc. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311,
A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311
3.3V DC based on 5V DC
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. Also, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 21 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
It is a figure which illustrates. The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first specific game state ST2, a second specific game state ST3, a third specific game state ST4, and a fourth specific game state ST5. In addition, as the special game state, there is a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived,
A production mode that determines the production mode of the game by being controlled by the production control device 300, a main start area that is a start area that should be mainly targeted in the game state, and a main variation special figure that is the type of special figure variation display game that should be mainly executed. , and the shooting direction of the game ball.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the first starting prize-winning port 36 by hitting to the left, and to aim to win a prize in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 or the second starting prize-winning port 97 by hitting to the right. It is possible. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Also, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first start winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. As will be described later, in this normal game state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time,
The player is prevented from selecting execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST1.

The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning.
If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. again,
The main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, but the main start area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37,
In order to aim at this normal variable winning device 37, the shooting direction is right-handed. That is, special figure 1
It is designed so that the variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this first specific game state ST2, the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game becomes shorter than in the case of the normal game state ST1. It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.

The second specific game state ST3 is the first specific game state ST2 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.
is the same as In addition, in the third specific game state ST4, the production mode that defines the production mode is the probability variable mode, and the condition for ending the general electric support is the start of a special figure fluctuation display game in which a fall lottery win or a big hit is started. It is the same as 1 specific game state ST2.

In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure probability is basically a high probability state. However, when the falling lottery is won during the fourth specific game state ST5, the fourth specific game state ST5 is maintained although the state shifts to a low probability state. In addition, there is no public electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is a time saving for shortening the variable time of the special figure variable display game. The production mode that defines the production mode is a small hit RUSH
It is said that In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second start winning opening 97, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In this fourth specific game state ST5, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is normal game state S
It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game by hitting to the right and aiming at the second start winning opening 97 in a time saving state that is shorter than in the case of T1. Since the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small win than the special figure 1 variation display game, and the probability of winning a small win is higher than that of a big win, there is no small win in this fourth specific game state ST5. It occurs frequently and the number of balls possessed by the player increases. Since small hits occur with high frequency in this way, the production mode is the small hit R
This mode is called USH.

Among these five game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1 because there is a general electric support, and the first specific game state ST2 and the third specific game state ST4 are high probability states, so normal This state is more advantageous for the player than the game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3. Furthermore, the fourth specific game state ST5 is a state in which the number of balls possessed by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, so the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3 and the third specific game state ST1 This state is more advantageous for the player than the game state ST4.

The transition of the game state is the end of the special game state based on the derivation of the special result, the completion of the prescribed number of games, winning the fall lottery that is the transition lottery to the low probability state, and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that will be a big hit. performed by Basically, when the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a probability variable jackpot with a high probability state after the end of the special game state, the transition is made to the first specific game state ST2, and the special In the case of a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the game state, the game shifts to the second specific game state ST3.

In the second specific game state ST3, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of support times) from the end of the special game state, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, when the falling lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the game moves to the second specific game state ST3.
In this case, the period of staying in the second specific game state ST3 is the period from the end of the special game state to the execution of 100 times of the special figure variation display game, including the number of games executed in the first specific game state ST2. . Since the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 are set to the same chance mode in the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp the shift.

100 without winning the fall lottery in the first specific game state ST2 and without deriving a special result
When the special figure variation display game is executed twice, the game moves to the third specific game state ST4. Here, since the production mode is the variable probability mode, the player can grasp that it is in a high probability state. If the fall lottery is won in this third specific game state ST4, the normal game state ST1
transition to Further, when the fall lottery is not won in the third specific game state ST4 and a special figure variation display game for a big hit is started, the game moves to the fourth specific game state ST5.

The fourth specific game state ST4 stays only during the period of execution of the special figure variation display game that will result in a big hit. When the special figure 1 variation display game is a special figure variation display game that results in a big win, the period in which the special game state based on the small win is executed after the small win is derived in the special figure 2 variation display game is the special figure 1. Since the variable display game is interrupted, the player stays for a period that is the sum of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the period of suspension.

By providing the fourth specific game state ST5, it is possible to provide a period for increasing the player's ball possession by the small win before the special game state based on the big win is started, and in the fourth specific game state ST5. The increase in the number of balls held in the second game and the subsequent increase in the number of balls held in the special game state can provide the player with many benefits. In particular, the situation in which it is possible to shift to the fourth specific game state ST5 is
This is a so-called stuck state in which the next big win is not derived even if the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times after the special game state based on the probability variable big win is finished, and profit is given to the player in such a situation. By making it possible, it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that a big hit is not derived. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with an amusement which is not found in conventional game machines, in which players expect to be stuck.

22 and 23 show an example of game progress. FIG. 22(a) shows a case where the drop lottery is won before the specified number (100 times in this case) of special figure variation display games are executed after the occurrence of the variable probability big hit. In this example, first, the state is a normal game state ST1 which is a low probability state and no general electric support, and the effect is a normal mode effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. The result of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in this normal game state ST1 is the first
After the special figure 1 variable display game is finished, the game is in the first special game state (t11). In the first special game state, the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. Also, the effect state is the first special game effect corresponding to the first special game state.

When this first special game state ends, it becomes a first specific game state ST2 in which there is a high probability state and general electric support (t12). In the first specific game state ST2, the normal variable winning device 37
Since it is easy to win a prize, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game. again,
The variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shorter than that of the normal game state ST1, and a large number of special figure variation display games can be executed in a short time. In this first specific game state, the production state is the chance mode production.

In this example, the falling lottery is won in this first specific game state ST2, and based on this, the state shifts to the low probability state and becomes the second specific game state ST3 (t13). Public electricity support will remain as it is. Also in the second specific game state ST3, the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easy, so the game progresses mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shorter than that of the normal game state ST1, and many special figure variation display games can be executed in a short time. Even in this second specific game state, the performance state is a state in which the chance mode performance is maintained, making it difficult to grasp that the falling lottery has been won.

After that, when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the first special game state (t12) reaches a specified number in the second specific game state ST3, the general electric support ends and the normal game state ST1 ( t14). In this example, the probability state is already a low probability state, so
Remains in a low probability state.

FIG. 22(b) shows a case where the fall lottery is not won even if the specified number of special figure fluctuation display games are executed after the occurrence of the probability variable jackpot. In the normal game state ST1, the probability variable jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state (t21), and after the end of this first special game state until the first specific game state ST2 (t22) is the same as in FIG. 22(a). is.

In this example, the falling lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the first special game state (t22) remains the specified number ( 100 times here) has been reached (t23). In this case, after the specified number of special figure variation display games are completed, the game state shifts to the third specific game state ST4.

Even in the third specific game state ST4, there is a high probability state and general electric support, and in the second specific game state ST3, it becomes easy to win a prize to the normal variable winning device 37, so the game progresses mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game. do. In addition, in the third specific game state, the effect state becomes the probability variable mode effect, and the player can clearly grasp that the state is a high probability state. After that, when the falling lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4, the state shifts to the low probability state, the general electric support ends, and the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 (t24).

FIG. 23(a) shows the case where the first special result is derived in the first specific game state ST2. In this case, even if the special figure variation display game as the first special result is started (t31),
The probability state remains the high probability state and the general electric support remains as it is. Also, the production state is kept as the chance mode production. Then, when the special figure variation display game ends, a special game state is started (t23). Along with the start of the special game state, the state shifts to the low probability state and the general electric support ends (t32). In addition, in this example, the normal jackpot that forms the first special result is derived, and when the first special game state based on the first special result ends, the second specific game state becomes a low probability state and general electric support. becomes ST3 (t33)
.

Similarly, when the first special result is derived in the second specific game state ST3, even if the special figure variation display game as the first special result is started, the probability state remains the low probability state. Public electricity support is also left untouched. Furthermore, the production state remains the chance mode production. Then, along with the start of the special game state, the low probability state is maintained and the general electric support is terminated. That is, the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3
Even if the special figure variation display game that becomes the first special result is started in , the game state does not change.

FIG. 23(b) shows the case where the first special result is derived in the third specific game state ST4. In this case, when the special figure variation display game that is the first special result is started, the probability state remains in the high probability state, but the general electric support ends, and the fourth specific game state ST5 (t
41). By the end of the power electric support, it is possible to win a prize to the second start prize mouth 97,
In the specific game state ST5, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variation display game.
Also, the effect state is a small hit RUSH effect corresponding to the fourth specific game state. This fourth specific game state ST5 is continued until the end of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variation display game.
In the example of FIG. 23(b), after the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 (t41), the second start winning opening 97 is won and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t42). This special figure 2 variable display game ends with a loss. After that, the second start winning opening 97 is newly won, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t43). This special figure 2 variation display game results in a small hit that forms the second special result, and with the end of the special figure 2 variation display game, the second
A special game state is entered (t45 to t46). In this second special game state, the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened and prize balls can be won.

The special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted with the derivation of the small hit in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t4
4), the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special game state (t46)
. Since the fluctuation time does not progress during the interruption, the execution time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the time set at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, plus the stop display time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. And it will be extended by the period of the second special game state. In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the first special result started in the third specific game state ST4, is the first specific game state ST
2 is longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the first special result.
Therefore, it is possible to ensure a sufficient period of the fourth specific game state ST5.

After the second special game state is finished, when the game ball newly enters the second start winning hole 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (t47). After that, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed a plurality of times and the second special game state is generated, whereby a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special result is stopped and displayed (
t48), when the stop display time ends, the special figure 1 variable display game ends (t49). Along with this, the fourth special game state ST5 ends and the first special game state starts (t49). Also, with the derivation of the first special result in the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is forcibly terminated with a losing result (t48).

Thus, by setting the fourth specific game state ST5 before the first special game state, the prize balls that can be obtained based on the small hit that occurs in the fourth specific game state ST5 and the first special game state The player can acquire a large amount of prize balls by the prize balls that can be obtained by

In addition, as shown in FIG. 23(b), in the third specific game state ST4, with the start of the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit, the general electric support is ended, and the power supply shown in FIG. 22(b) As shown, the change in the general electric support is the same as when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the occurrence of either the winning of the falling lottery or the winning of the jackpot, which have greatly different values for the player, due to the end of the general electric support in the third specific game state ST4. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by giving a feeling of uneasiness and expectation to the player.

In particular, in both the case of starting the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit in the third specific game state ST4 and the case of winning the drop lottery in the third specific game state ST4, a constant from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game By executing a common transition performance for the time, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping that he or she has won the drop lottery or that he or she has won a jackpot, and it is possible to arouse the player's sense of unease and expectation. It is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 24 shows an example of the display on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 24(a) shows an example of display in the normal game state ST1. In the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decoration special figure 1 game display section for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game related to a special figure 1 variation display game among the first decoration games constituting the decoration special figure variation display game. 85a is provided. Here, the decoration special figure variable display game is displayed by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of a combination of three pieces of identification information, and either a big win, a small win, or a loss is displayed according to the result of the special figure variation display game. In addition, since the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation in the normal game state ST1, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, which is an irregular variation, is not displayed, but is displayed. Also good.

In addition, a first memory display portion 83a for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the first memory display unit 83a corresponds to the first start memory one-on-one, and is displayed in order of memory, and here there are three first start memories. It is shown that. The decoration special figure start memory display of the left end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the 1st start memory memorized first, and is designed to shift to the left each time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each starting memory and the result of the prediction such as the variation pattern by the display mode.
In addition, in FIG. 24(a), a look-ahead effect is performed to change the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display for the first starting memory in which the digestion order is the first.

On the left side of the first memory display section 83a, there is provided a running memory display section 84 for displaying information related to starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. This in-execution memory display section 8
4, at the start of the special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display unit 83a shifts, and the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed, the variation pattern, etc. are displayed in its display mode. It is suggested by

A first starting memory number display portion 86a for displaying the first starting memory number is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. The first starting memory number display section 86a displays the number of first starting memories by numbers, and FIG. 24(a) shows that there are three first starting memories. Also, an effect mode display section 87 for displaying the current effect mode is provided in the upper left part of the display area.
Here, the normal mode, ie, the normal game state ST1 is shown.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variation display game is not generated, so the start memory display unit for displaying the second start memory is not provided, but the special figure 2 variation When the second starting memory for suspending the start of the displayed game is generated, the second starting memory is displayed in the same manner as the first memory display section 83a and the first starting memory number display section 86a.

Also, the display in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 are basically the same as the display in FIG. A similar display is performed.

FIG. 24(b) shows an example of display in the fourth specific game state ST5. In the upper right part of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first starting memory number display section 86a that displays the number of first starting memories, and a special figure 1 variation display of the first decoration game that constitutes the decoration special figure variation display game. A first decoration special figure 1 game display section 85a for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game related to the game, and a decoration special figure variation display game related to the special figure 1 variation display game among the second decoration games forming the decoration special figure variation display game. A second decoration special figure 1 game display section 88a for displaying is provided.

In the first start memory number display section 86a, the number of first start memories is displayed numerically, and FIG. 24(b) shows that the number of the first start memories is zero. In the first decoration special figure 1 game display section 85c, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas. Second decoration special figure 1 game display section 88
In a, a decoration special figure variable display game is displayed by stopping display after a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of one piece of identification information, and one of "o" indicating a big win, "triangle" indicating a small win, and "x" indicating a loss is displayed.

In the lower right part of the display area, a first decoration special figure 2 game display section 8 for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game related to a special figure 2 variation display game among the first decoration games constituting the decoration special figure variation display game.
5b, and a second decoration special figure 2 game display section 88b for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game related to a special figure 2 variation display game among the second decoration games forming the decoration special figure variation display game.

In the first decoration special figure 2 game display section 85b, a decoration special figure variation display game is displayed in the same manner as the first decoration special figure 1 game display section 85a. Further, in the second decoration special figure 2 game display section 88b, a decoration special figure variation display game is displayed in the same manner as the second decoration special figure 1 game display section 88a. In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not generated, so the second starting memory number display unit for displaying the number of the second starting memory is not provided. , Toku-zu 2 fluctuation display When the second starting memory for suspending the start of the game is generated, the second starting memory that displays the number of the second starting memory in the same manner as the first starting memory number display section 86a A number display should be provided.

Also, in the center of the display area, an effect display section 89 is provided for performing effect display using characters and the like. This effect display unit 89 mainly displays the effect corresponding to the variation pattern and result of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation, and the player can see the progress of the special figure variation display game by the effect display. and the results can be understood.

In the fourth specific game state ST5, the identification information is not displayed large like the first decoration special figure 1 game display portion 85a of FIG. 24(a), but only when the result is derived You may make it display a mode large. For example, the identification information is enlarged from the first decoration special figure 1 game display portion 85a or the first decoration special figure 2 game display portion 85b corresponding to the special figure variation display game from which the result is derived and is displayed in the center of the display area. Then, when the stop display time ends, display is performed so that the identification information is reduced in size on the original display unit. Even while performing such a display, the display of the first decoration special figure 1 game display portion 85a and/or the first decoration special figure 2 game display portion 85b is maintained.

The effect mode display section 87 indicates that it is the small hit RUSH mode, that is, the fourth specific game state ST5. Also, in the lower left part of the display area, there is provided a number-of-prize-balls display portion 91 that indicates the number of prize balls won in the second special game state during execution of the second special game state. Here, it is shown that 30 prize balls have been obtained in the second special game state. Furthermore, in the lower left part of the display area, the cumulative number of prize balls indicating the number of prize balls obtained from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 accompanying the end of the third specific game state ST4 to the transition to the first special game state A display 92 is provided. Here, it is shown that 600 prize balls have been obtained so far.

In addition, the number of won prize balls in the first special game state is also added in the cumulative prize ball number display section 92, and the first special game is played from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 accompanying the end of the third specific game state ST4. The number of prize balls acquired by the end of the state may be indicated. Furthermore, the number of prize balls obtained in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3 and the third specific game state ST4 is also added, and the number is obtained from the end of the normal game state ST1 to the return to the normal game state ST1. The number of awarded balls may be indicated. However, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state S
In T3 and the third specific game state ST4, although a certain number of prize balls are acquired, more balls are consumed, so the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3 and the third specific game state ST4. It is also possible not to add the number of prize balls in .

In the lower center of the display area, a continuous number display section 96 is provided to display the number of big hits in a specific period which starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. This consecutive number display section 96 can be displayed in a game state other than the normal game state ST1. FIG. 24(b) shows that three big hits have occurred.

The condition for starting the specific period is established by deriving a big win in the normal game state ST1, and the condition for ending the specific period is established by returning to the normal game state ST1 from a game state other than the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in principle, the number of consecutive hits displayed in the display section 96 is the number of hits that have occurred until returning to the normal game state ST1, with the first hit being the jackpot in the normal game state ST1, which is the jackpot that satisfies the conditions for starting the specific period. Is displayed.

However, in a specific case, even if the jackpot derived in the normal game state ST1 is an exception,
The result of addition up to that point is taken over and added without being counted as the second time. As a specific case in this embodiment, a case where a big hit is derived in a special figure fluctuation display game in which a fall lottery is won, or a case where one special figure fluctuation display game in which a fall lottery is won is started before the end of the other There is a case where the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit and shifts to the specific game state again.

For example, when the fall lottery is won in the special figure fluctuation display game in the third specific game state ST4, the transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, but the special figure won in the fall lottery. During execution of the variable display game, a first specific effect is performed for suggesting or notifying that the falling lottery has been won. In this first specific effect, it is clearly notified that the fall lottery has been won just before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game, so the player can not know that the fall lottery has been won until the special figure fluctuation display game ends. They do not have a clear understanding of it, and are playing games believing that it is still in a high-probability state. Furthermore, in this case, an effect may be performed to suggest or notify that the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, is being executed in parallel. In addition, when a big hit is obtained in a special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won, the winning of the fall lottery may not be clearly notified as a result of the first specific effect. For this reason, if the value of the consecutive number display section 96 is reset only on the condition that the state has shifted to the normal game state ST1, the player who thinks that the specific period continues may have a sense of suspicion.

For this reason, when a big hit is derived in a special figure fluctuation display game in which the fall lottery is won or a special figure fluctuation display game started before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fall lottery is won, Even when the result is derived in the normal game state ST1, it is treated in the same way as the big win derived in the specific game state, and the number of times displayed on the consecutive number display part 96 is the number of big wins before shifting to the normal game state ST1. I am trying to take over and add.

It should be noted that the normal game state ST from the end of the normal game state ST1 in the cumulative number of prize balls display section 92
Similarly, in the case where the number of prize balls acquired before returning to 1 is indicated, the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery and the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery were started before the end. When a big win is derived in a special figure variation display game, it is handled in the same way as a big win derived in a specific game state, and the number of winning balls before shifting to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and added.

That is, the effect control device 300 is started by establishment of a predetermined start condition,
It is possible to set a specific period that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and it is possible to accumulate and report game information (the number of big hits and the number of winning balls) from the start to the end of the specific period. be. Also, in a specific case, the information before shifting to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and added.

FIGS. 24(c) to (i) show an example of the transition effect executed when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4 or when the jackpot is won. When the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 24(c), the variation display is started in the first decoration special figure 1 game display section 85a, and then the shift as shown in FIG. 24(d) The performance begins. This transition effect is a effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight, and the result of the special figure variation display game and the presence or absence of a drop lottery are notified according to the result of the battle. Also, the decoration special figure variation display game and the start memory display are performed in the same display as that shown in FIG. 24(b).

As shown in FIG. 24(e), an effect in which the characters fight is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, the result of the fight is shown. In the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won, if the result is a loss or a small hit, the teammate character 89a loses as shown in FIG. 24(f). After that, it shifts to the production of the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 24(a). Further, an instruction display for instructing to return to left-handed hitting is performed when shifting to the production of the normal game state ST1. on the other hand,
If the special figure variation display game results in a big hit, the teammate character 89a wins as shown in FIG. 24(g). After that, it shifts to the production of the fourth specific game state ST5 as shown in FIG. 24(b).

Further, when the falling lottery is not won and the result is a loss or a small hit in the special figure variation display game, a transition effect may be performed as a so-called fake effect. In this case, after the characters fight as shown in FIG. 24(e), the result is a draw as shown in FIG. 24(h). After that, it returns to the production of the third specific game state ST4 as shown in FIG. 24(c).

Although the transition timing to the fourth specific game state is set at the start of the special figure variation display game that will be a big hit, it may be during execution of the special figure variation display game that will be a big hit, even after the start time. good. In addition, regardless of the execution of the special figure variation display game that results in a big hit, the game may be shifted to the fourth specific game state upon establishment of a predetermined transition condition. As a predetermined transition condition,
Such as winning the shift lottery, executing a predetermined number of games, and deriving a specific result in a special figure variation display game.

Also, if it is possible to store a plurality of second starting memories that are the right to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, whether or not it will be a big hit before the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the second starting memory If it is found that there is a second start memory that will be a big hit, the fourth specific game state before the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second start memory that will be the big hit. You may make it move.

Also, the high probability state is ended by winning the falling lottery, but the high probability state may be ended by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state. However, the high probability state may be maintained until the next derivation of the first special result.

From the above, a game that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when a variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the machine, the control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and the start winning opening are formed, and the closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize and the open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize can be converted. , and a normal variable prize winning device 37 that can generate the right to execute a variable display game by winning a prize,
The control means controls the operating state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than in the first operating state, and the variable display game is performed. is set to either a low-probability state or a high-probability state higher than the low-probability state, and in the high-probability state, a low-probability state is set each time the variable display game is executed. It is configured to perform a drop lottery for shifting to the state, and if the drop lottery is won in the second operation state, it is possible to shift to the first operation state, and in the second operation state. In some cases, even if the falling lottery is not won, it is possible to shift to the first operation state when executing a variable display game with a special result. Therefore, when the fall lottery is won and when the big win is derived, the change in the operation state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 can be made the same, making it difficult to distinguish between them, and the amusement of the game can be improved. can.

Further, the control means can set the second operation state for a predetermined period from the end of the special game state to the execution of the predetermined number of times of the variable display game, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the second operation state is set to the high probability state. In certain cases, the second operating state can be set, and for a predetermined period of time, even if the falling lottery is won in the second operating state, the state does not shift to the first operating state, and in the second operating state, the operation state does not change. Even when a variable display game with a special result is executed without winning the fall lottery, the transition to the first operation state is prevented, and when the high probability state continues after the elapse of a predetermined period, the fall lottery is won. The first operation state is established based on the establishment of either the case where the falling lottery is not won and the variable display game with a special result is executed. Therefore, when the fall lottery is won and when the big win is derived, the change in the operation state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 can be made the same, making it difficult to distinguish between them, and the amusement of the game can be improved. can.

In addition, a first start prize winning port 36 forming a start prize winning port, and a start prize winning position downstream of the normal variable prize winning device 37 and capable of winning via a prize winning route to the normal variable prize winning device 37 The control means executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. , a second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning hole, the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and at least the second variable display is performed. The game result includes a second special result whose probability is constant regardless of the game state, and the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during execution of the first variable display game. When the second special game state advantageous to the player is executed, the first variation display game is interrupted during execution of the second special game state. Therefore, a large number of second variation display games with a high probability of a small win can be executed based on the start of the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit, and profits can be given to the player, so that the interest in the game can be increased. can be improved.

In the high probability state, the execution time of the variable display game is set to be shorter than in the low probability state, and the special result is the first special result that can change the probability derived according to the game state. , and a second special result whose probability of being derived is constant regardless of the game state, and the probability of deriving the second special result in the second variable display game is higher than the probability of deriving the first special result. With a high probability, when the result of the variable display game is the first special result, the first special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the result of the variable display game is the second special result. , the second special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the first
When the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during execution of the variable display game and the second special game state is executed, the first variable display is executed during the execution of the second special game state. The game is interrupted, and the first variable display game is restarted upon completion of the second special game state. Therefore, a large number of second variation display games with a high probability of a small win can be executed based on the start of the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit, and profits can be given to the player, so that the interest in the game can be increased. can be improved.

Note that in the present embodiment, if the second special game state is executed while the result of the other variable display game is the second special result while one of the variable display games is being executed, the other variable display game is executed. One of the variable display games is interrupted from the time when the second special result is stopped and displayed after the end of the variable time until the end of the second special game state, but the stop display time of the other variable display game One variable display game may be interrupted from the time when the second special game state is started after the end to the end of the second special game state. The same applies to modified examples to be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the other variation display game becomes the first special result during the execution of one variation display game and the first special game state is executed, the other variation display game is executed. When the first special result is stop-displayed after the end of the variable display time, one of the variable display games is forcibly stopped with a losing result, but the stop display time of the other variable display game is over. When the first special game state is started, one of the variable display games may be forcibly stopped as a result of losing. The same applies to modified examples to be described later.

In addition, the start time of interruption or forced stop may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the time when the special result is stopped and the time when the special game state is started may be selected. You can do it. Furthermore, the start time of interruption or forced stop is not limited to when the special result is stop-displayed or when the special game state is started, and may be started at other timings. The end of the interruption may also be at a timing other than the end of the special game state. Also, the interrupted state may be generated when the result of one variable display game becomes the first special result and the first special game state is executed while the other variable display game is being executed. In addition, for each of the special figures 1 and 2, when the first special result or the second special result is derived, it can be arbitrarily set whether it is interrupted or forced to stop.

The normal variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a game ball retention function that retains game balls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b. is retained, and when the movable member 37b is in an open state, it swallows the game ball (movable member 3
The game ball staying on 7b can be dropped and won into the general electric prize winning port 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to enter the normal variable winning device 37, that is, the number of game balls that arrive at the normal variable winning device 37 but cannot enter the normal electrical winning port 37d.

In addition, since the second starting prize winning port 97 is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball that fails to win the normal variable winning device 37 can win the second starting winning port 97. .
In the case of this embodiment, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 reduces the number of game balls that fail to enter the normal variable winning device 37. 1 specific game state ST2, 2nd specific game state ST3, 3rd specific game state ST4), it is possible to make it difficult to win the second start winning port 97.

The main starting area of the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 is the general electrical winning opening 37d, and the main starting area of the fourth specific game state ST5 is the second starting winning opening. 97, in the case of the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, that is, when there is a high/low probability support state, winning to the second start winning port 97 is impossible. It is (difficult), and it is preferable that winning to the second starting winning port 97 is possible only in the case of the fourth specific game state ST5, that is, when there is no high probability support state. First specific game state S
T2, second specific game state ST3, second start winning port 97 at the time of the third specific game state ST4
If a game ball wins a prize and a small hit occurs, there is a possibility that the ball output rate deviates greatly from the design value.

The winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 can be calculated using the following formula (1).
Winning rate [%] = Number of game balls that have won a prize in the general electric prize-winning port 37d/normal variable prize-winning device 37
number of game balls (game balls that flowed into the starting point of the downflow path 37f) x 100 (1)
In this embodiment, the second starting winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the game area 32 , and the normal variable winning opening 37 is arranged above the second starting winning opening 97 . And the normal variable winning device 37
has a game ball staying function, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to enter the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b of the normal variable prize winning device 37 to the start of operation, and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable prize winning device 37 (the downflow path 3
7f by adjusting the time required for the game ball to roll from the start point to the end point of 7f), etc., to make the failure of winning a prize to the normal variable winning device 37 in the winning state of the normal figure almost 0, that is, the normal It is also possible to make the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 almost 100% in the winning state of the figure. By setting the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal winning state to almost 100%, it is possible to make it difficult to win the second start winning port 97 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to achieve the desired performance (ball output rate).

On the other hand, when there is no high probability support state (fourth specific game state ST5), the normal variable winning device 37
does not open, the game ball can be made to enter the second start winning port 97, and the small hit RUSH
can be realized. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to configure the second start winning port 97 to win only when the high probability no support state (fourth specific game state ST5), and achieve the desired performance. .

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(a), the normal pattern fluctuation time (that is, normal pattern fluctuation time) is 200 ms, and the normal pattern stop time (that is, normal map display time) is 100 ms. Yes, the normal electric operation time (that is, the sum of the total electric open time and the total wait time per normal hit state) is 5800 ms, and the ending time (that is,
If the sum of the normal electric residual ball processing time and the normal electric ending time) is 700 msec, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 msec (=700 msec+
200 ms + 100 ms). In this case, the length of the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of undulations provided in the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g, etc. are appropriately designed, and the retention time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is 1000 msec. , it becomes possible to make the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal winning state almost 100%.

Of course, as in the example shown here, according to the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation, the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal winning state is set to be almost 100%. , the retention time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 may be set, or conversely, according to the retention time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 in the winning state of the normal figure The time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation may be set so that the winning rate of 1 is almost 100%.

That is, in the present embodiment, one of the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is replaced with the time corresponding to the other (
The winning rate of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 can be increased by setting the time substantially the same as the other, or the time longer than the other. In addition, by increasing the retention time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 by increasing the portion that suppresses the power of the ball such as the rising part and the lower part, Until the start), more game balls can be retained on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is in an open state,
Since the game balls staying on the movable member 37b can be made to win, the winning rate of the game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function,
Since the second starting winning port 97 and the special variable winning device 38 are arranged below the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball arrives at the second starting winning port 97 and the special variable winning device 38 after being shot. The time until the normal variable prize winning device 37 does not have the game ball staying function can be made longer. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the use of an unrecommended hitting method, and increase the degree of freedom in the opening pattern of the big winning opening (opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing member 990).

In the normal game state ST1, left-handed hitting is recommended, but when the right-handed hitting is made in the normal game state ST1 and the game ball enters the second start winning hole 97, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed. In the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to be longer than that in the second specific game state, but by performing aiming shots (stop shots, timing shots, etc.), a large winning opening It is possible to aim for the prize. When the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state ST1. At the same time as the start of the small winning game state (start of opening the big winning opening), the game ball is made to arrive at the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small winning game state, and the game ball is made to reach the big winning device 38. It is possible to win a prize in the prize winning opening. Therefore, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game during the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility that an unrecommended hitting method (right hitting) is performed.

On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has a game ball staying function, the game balls arrive at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do so. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state, even if aiming such as starting to hit the game ball with the start of the small winning game state (start of opening the big winning opening), the game ball , the special variable winning device 3 by the end of the small hit gaming state
I can't get to 8. Therefore, it is useless to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game during the normal game state ST1, so it is not recommended to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game during the normal game state ST1, that is, in the normal game state ST1. You can avoid being hit.
Thus, according to the present embodiment, fraudulent winning by strategy, that is, the normal game state ST1
, it is possible to prevent a small winning prize (a prize to a large winning opening during the period of the small winning) by generating a small winning by hitting to the right and aiming.

In addition, if the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have a game ball retention function, it prevents fraudulent winning by strategy (avoids unrecommended hitting). ), it is necessary to limit the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state, such as performing short opening only once. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has a game ball staying function, the game ball reaches the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do so. Therefore, even if the big winning opening is opened multiple times during the small winning game state, it is possible to prevent fraudulent winning due to capture, so that the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state can be increased. can.

Here, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38
does not have a game ball retention function, and it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball to reach the special variable winning device 38 after being shot. In such a case, if the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. Even if a target shot such as starting to hit the game ball is performed at the start of the game state, since the small winning game state is completed by the time the game ball reaches the special variable winning device 38, the game ball enters the big winning opening. I can't win.

On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. .
If it is a pattern of 5 seconds open state → 1.0 seconds closed state → 0.5 seconds open state”, by performing aiming such as starting to hit a game ball at the start of the small winning game state, the small winning game state Since the game ball can reach the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the game, the game ball can win the big winning opening. Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern of opening the big winning opening a plurality of times or the like is adopted as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state, it is impossible to prevent fraudulent winning by strategy. On the other hand, adopting an opening pattern of opening the big winning hole a plurality of times as the opening pattern of the big winning hole in the small winning game state, that is, increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning hole in the small winning game state. If it is possible, it is possible to improve the small winning performance (increase the number of balls output in the small winning game state), but it cannot be achieved by cheating.

In order to prevent fraudulent winning by strategy and improve the small winning performance, a retention device (of this embodiment) that delays the time from when the game ball is launched until it arrives at the special variable winning device 38 In that case, a normal variable prize winning device 37) or the like is provided. If the staying device causes a delay of 2 seconds (a delay time of 2 seconds is given), it takes about 4 seconds from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the special variable winning device 38 .

As a result, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state is, for example, as shown in FIG.
, that is, "0.5 seconds open state → 1.0 seconds closed state → 0.5 seconds open state →
1.0 seconds closed → 0.5 seconds open", it takes 3.5 seconds (=0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds) to complete the operation of the opening/closing member 990. +0.5 seconds), while it takes about 4 seconds from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the special variable winning device 38 . That is, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the special variable winning device 38 is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the opening and closing member 990 in the small winning game state. In addition, it can be configured to determine the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 according to the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing member 990 (opening pattern of the big winning opening) in the small winning game state.

Than the time from the start of the operation of the opening and closing member 990 in the small hit game state to the end of the operation (3.5 seconds in this example), the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (this For example, by lengthening the period of about 4 seconds), even if the game ball is aimed at starting to hit the game ball with the start of the small winning game state, the small winning game will be played by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. The state is terminated. Therefore, even if an opening pattern of opening the big winning opening a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state, it is possible to prevent fraudulent winning by strategy.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, by providing a retention device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from when the game ball is launched until it arrives at the special variable winning device 38, it is possible to prevent fraudulent winning due to capture. , It is possible to improve the small hit performance. Further, the longer the delay time, the longer the total time of the small-hit game state, so that the small-hit performance can be enhanced. Also, the longer the delay time, the more time it takes to reach the special variable prize winning device 38, which makes it more difficult to win fraudulently. Moreover, providing such a staying device or the like is effective not only for aiming during the general electric support but also for aiming during the small hit RUSH. In addition, the longer the delay time, the more difficult it is to aim and hit, so the player has to keep hitting, and stable data can be obtained even in the operation of the hole.

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, hit right and enter the second start winning port 97 to generate a small hit. When the figure hits, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37. It is possible to make it difficult for the special variable winning device 38 to win a prize. That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes time for the game balls to reach the special variable winning device 38 due to the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37, so fraudulent winning by strategy can be prevented. Furthermore, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37 (making it difficult for the special variable winning device 38 to win),
It is possible to minimize the damage caused by fraudulent winning by cheating.

In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state, it is possible not only to realize the improvement of the small winning performance (increase in ball output in the small winning game state), but also to open the big winning opening 38d. Since it is also possible to increase the number of times, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball will flow into the big winning opening 38d, thereby improving the interest of the game. It should be noted that the time from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the special variable winning device 38 is about 2
Seconds, and about four seconds if there is a retention device, are shown as examples, but these arrival times are merely average values of actually measured values, and of course there is an error in the actual arrival times.

In addition, the alert (error notification) performed when the player hits right in the normal game state may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the second start winning opening 97 is satisfied. , It may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the normal pattern start gate 34 is satisfied, or the number of game balls that have entered the second start winning port 97 and the normal pattern start gate 34 have passed It may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a loss of interest and a loss of desire to play due to being immediately alerted to a wrong shot to the right. In addition, in the normal game state, the counter for counting the game balls that have won the second start winning port 97 and the counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the normal figure start gate 34 are configured to be cleared at a predetermined timing. good and
Alternatively, it may be configured to be updated by -1 each time the first start winning port 36 wins.

FIG. 26 shows the probability of a big win and a small win, the distribution probability of a big win type when winning a big win, and the distribution probability of a small win type when winning a small win. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a big hit (first special result), is common to special figures 1 and 2,
The probability in the normal game state which is a low probability state and the specific game state which is a high probability state is shown in FIG.
The probability is as shown in 6(a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, after the special game state (first special game state) based on the probability variable jackpot ends, the state becomes a high probability state. is configured to be again,
Both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are in a high probability state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. high probability state.

A small hit probability, which is a probability of a small win (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 26(b). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the game state or the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big win and the small win, the big win and the small win are not won in duplicate.

In addition, FIG. 26(c) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected for special figures 1 and 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type, and FIG. Possible types of small hits, opening time, number of times of opening and distribution probability of each type of small hits are shown. In addition, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1, and the special figure 2
It is also possible to set only to

27 and 28 show the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 27(a) shows a variation pattern when the result is a win in the normal game state (low probability state). In the normal game state, the special figure 1 variation display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variation display game is designed to be the irregular variation. In order for the player to proceed with the game according to this design, for the special figure 2, even if any variation pattern is selected, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal game state, the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variation display game, but by setting the variation time to a long time in the case of a losing result or a small hit described later, it is special in the normal game state. The execution of the FIG. 2 variation display game is made to be inefficient in terms of time, and the player is allowed to proceed with the special figure 1 variation display game mainly in the normal game state.

In FIG. 27(b), the specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3
, 3rd specific game state ST4, 4th specific game state ST5). In this case, as for the variation pattern without reach in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the variation pattern with a shorter variation time than in the normal game state is selected. In the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3 and the third specific game state ST4, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the main variation, and the time saving state in which the variation time is shortened compared to the normal game state. In addition, only the variable pan without reach can be selected for the special figure 2 variable display game. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the main variation, and the time-saving state in which the variation time is shortened compared to the normal game state.

FIG. 28(a) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big win in the normal game state.
For special figure 2, it is possible to select only the variation pattern that does not generate a reach state. In the normal game state, the variation time when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit is a variation time longer than the selectable variation time when the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a big hit.

FIG. 28(b) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. For the special figure 1 variation display game, a variation pattern of variation time equivalent to that in the normal game state is selected. Also, for the special figure 2 variation display game, a variation pattern of variation time equivalent to the SP3 reach of the special figure 1 variation display game is set.

FIG. 28(c) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the third specific game state. A very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. This makes it possible to ensure a sufficient time after shifting to the fourth specific game state, and to ensure an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. Also, the longer the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is, the more chances of occurrence of a small hit are increased, and the number of prize balls that can be acquired is increased, which is advantageous for the player. For this reason, it is made possible to select a plurality of types of times with different lengths as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game so that the profit that can be obtained may differ, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to a short fluctuation time. When a big hit occurs in a special figure 2 fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation in the third specific game state, even if the game shifts to the fourth specific game state, the small win cannot be generated frequently, so that the big win can be quickly achieved. It is designed to be derived. In addition, since the fourth specific game state is shifted when the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is started in the third specific game state, basically the special figure variation display game that becomes a big win is newly started. Therefore, the variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the fourth specific game state is not defined.

FIG. 28(d) shows a variation pattern when the result is a small win in the normal game state.
For special figure 2, the reach state is not generated, and a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. In FIG. 28(e), a specific game state (first specific game state ST2
, 2nd specific game state ST3, 3rd specific game state ST4, 4th specific game state ST5) shows the variation pattern when the result is a small hit. Variation patterns with very short variation times, none of which cause a reach condition, are selected.

In FIG. 29, a special variable winning device in a special game state (first special game state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special game state (second special game state) based on a small hit (second special result) showed the opening and closing pattern of In the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game, when the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot, the special variation winning device 38 is opened according to the big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1. - 特許庁In the big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, the opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). then 20
Rounds in which an interval period of 00 ms and an open period of 29000 ms are set are repeated until 10 rounds are performed, and after an ending period of 11000 ms elapses, the special game state ends. In addition, the jackpot type is 4R in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game
In the case of a probability variable jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot, the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened according to the big prize winning opening opening/closing pattern 2.例文帳に追加This opening/closing pattern differs from the 10R big hit opening/closing pattern only in the number of rounds.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening/closing pattern is the sum of the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which the first half of the 14
00 ms is the remaining ball processing time, and the latter half 600 ms is the interval time. again,
The ending period of the big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which the first half 1400 ms is the remaining ball processing time and the latter half 9600 ms is the ending time.

Fanfare period, opening period, interval period (including remaining ball processing time) and ending period (including remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure for the opening and closing pattern of the small hit
, and the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to this. In addition, in both the opening and closing patterns of the big win and the small win, when a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that time. The opening time of the small win is shorter than the opening time of the big win, and the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the special game state is reduced. Therefore, the small win has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the big win. That is, the special results include a first special result (jackpot) capable of generating a first special game state and a second special game state having a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. A possible second special result (minor win) is included.

The open/close pattern of the small win differs in the length of the fanfare period and the ending period depending on whether it is in the fourth specific game state or not, and is longer in the case of the fourth specific game state. In the fourth specific game state, since effects such as notification of a small hit and notification of the number of winning balls due to winning are performed, the time for these is ensured. In addition, since small wins occur frequently in the fourth specific game state, the fanfare period and the ending period are lengthened to lengthen the time required for digestion of the special game state, thereby preventing the number of prize balls per unit time from becoming too large. I have to. Also, the opening time of the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether it is in the fourth specific game state. Here, in each small win opening/closing pattern, only one opening is performed, but it is also possible to perform opening a plurality of times. In this case, the interval time for temporarily closing the special variable winning device 38 is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the specific game state.

Although both the length of the fanfare period and the length of the ending period are made different depending on whether or not the game is in the fourth specific game state, only one of them may be made different. Also, with respect to the opening/closing pattern of the jackpot, one or both of the length of the fanfare period and the ending period may be varied depending on whether or not the game is in the fourth specific game state.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. again,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply called hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (
A game is played by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and enters the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening. 36, ordinary variable winning device 3
7. Winning the second starting prize winning port 97 and the special variable prize winning device 38, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and discharged from the game area 32. And general prize gate 3
5. When the game ball wins the first start prize winning port 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37, the second start winning prize port 97, and the special variable prize winning device 38, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the prize winning port is paid out. A dispensing unit controlled by a control device 200 (see FIG. 19) discharges to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the first start winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the general prize winning port 35 arranged on the left side of the, and by shooting a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable prize winning device 37, the special It is possible to aim at winning the variable prize winning device 38, the second start prize winning port 97, and the general prize winning port 35 arranged above the second start prize winning port 97.

The winning ball to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a provided inside, A predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as one start memory. When the game ball wins the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the start right is generated. Along with this, the first start memory is stored, and 1 is added to the number of the first start memory, and immediately the first start memory is stored.
Based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and 1 is subtracted from the first starting memory number at this time. On the other hand, the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, the special figure 1
When the game ball wins the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 in the state where the variable display game is played and the special figure 1 variable display game is not finished or in the special game state. If the number of first starting memories is less than the upper limit number, one is added to the number of first starting memories and one first starting memory is stored. Then, in a state where the first start memory number is 1 or more, when the special figure 1 variation display game can be started (end of the previous special figure 1 variation display game or end of the special game state), the first The starting memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variation display game is started based on the stored first starting memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning hole 97 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting hole 3 switch 97a provided inside. When there is a winning to the second start winning opening 97 in a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variation display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variation display game has not ended, or when it is in a special game state Also, even if the game ball wins the second start winning port 97, the second start memory is not generated. In addition, when there is a prize to the second start winning port 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is generated once for the convenience of processing, but the second start memory is Since it will be consumed immediately, the second starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not occur.

In addition, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, and the extracted random number values are stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 19). To the special figure storage area (part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 4 times for the first start memory). Then, the number of memories of this special figure start memory is stored in the storage display unit 53 (special figure 1
While being displayed on the holding display), it is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and based on the winning to the second start winning opening 97, the special A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the FIG. 2 display device 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, but during execution of one of the special figure variation display games,
When the other special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (big hit), the one special figure variation display game is terminated with a result other than the special result (losing result).
Also, during the execution of one of the special figure fluctuation display games, if the other special figure fluctuation display game results in a second special result (small hit), the one of the special game states until the end of the special game state based on the small hit The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball to the general electric winning opening 37d (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) 1
It constitutes first execution control means for controlling the execution of a variable display game (first special figure variable display game).
In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) a second execution control means for controlling the execution of

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and it becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state).
Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display device 51 constitutes first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 . Also, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a jackpot game state (first special game state)
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (high probability of winning or having general electric support) It is possible. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display device 41
A decoration special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variation display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without having the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 in 0.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but in the normal game state with a low probability, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is the variation time. A very long (approximately 10 minutes) length variation is selected. As a result, special figure 2 in the normal game state
The execution of the variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting to the left and aiming at the first start winning opening 36. - 特許庁The long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

From the above, the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning opening 37), and the result of the game is a special result. In the gaming machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when it becomes, a game control means (game control device 100) for comprehensively controlling the game, and a special variable winning device that is opened in the special game state. (special variable winning device 38), and the game control means includes a fanfare period, which is a period from the start of the special game state to the start of opening the special variable winning device, and the last special variable winning device in the special game state. It is possible to set an ending period, which is the period from the end of the opening to the end of the special game state, and even if the special game state is based on the same special result, when the special result is derived The length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period can be varied according to the game state. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the first start winning port 36 forming the starting winning port, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97 forming the starting winning port, the first starting winning port 36 or the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 A first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) for executing the first variable display game based on the winning of the first variable display game, and a second variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 97. Second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100), and a specific game state (fourth specific game state) in which the execution time of the second variation display game is set to be shorter than the normal state
and a specific game state generating means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special The game state when the special result is derived is longer in the specific game state than when the game state when the result is derived is not in the specific game state. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. For example, in the specific game state, it is possible to secure the time to execute the effect, and in the case of not in the specific game state, the game can be progressed quickly.

In addition, in the special result, the first
There are a special result and a second special result whose probability of being derived is constant regardless of the game state, and the probability of deriving the second special result is higher than the probability of deriving the first special result. It means that it was made to be done. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, by making the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different for the second special result that does not change the probability, the derived probability does not change, but the execution mode can be changed.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 32 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (eg 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 30, first, processing for inhibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs, is processed. stack pointer setting processing (step X2
)I do. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00 as the higher order.
Either h or 01h is taken, and the leading 00h is set at step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6),
Processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal startup. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude some of the RAM areas for calculation.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the initialization switch 11
2 operation can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. I have to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed.
First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step X9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step X10;
N) returns to the determination (step X9) of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. .

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and whether the value of the timer is 0 is determined (step X12). If the timer value is not 0 (step X
12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). Also, if the timer value is 0 (step X
12; Y), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13), and off data is output to all output ports (output (step X14).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X15), read first However, it is judged from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

If the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X
18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), checksum calculation processing is performed to calculate the checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (step X19),
It is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (step X2
0). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), step X21 in FIG.
, and perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y),
If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17
; N or step X18; N), the checksum is not normal (step X20; N)
If it is determined that, the process proceeds to step X25 in FIG. 31 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. form.

At step X21 in FIG. 31, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step X21). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted (
step X22). Interruption of the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game means that when both special figure variation display games are executed as described later, the second special result (minor hit) is derived. By doing so, the other special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted, and the special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted in the restart control that is restarted after the end of the special game state. If it is interrupted, a special figure 1 game interruption flag or a special figure 2 game interruption flag is set according to the special figure fluctuation display game that is being interrupted, and these flags stop the power supply to the gaming machine. The memory is retained even while the

If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (step X22
;N) goes to step X24. Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted (step X22; Y), an interrupting command corresponding to the special figure being interrupted is set (step X23).

After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special game status prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X24), step Proceed to X30. In the case of this embodiment, in step X24, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command, and an interrupted command are transmitted. As a screen specification command, special figure 1 and special figure 2
If either is in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure fluctuation display game is not running or in the special game state, if the customer is waiting, the customer waiting demo screen command is sent, otherwise send a recovery screen command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, and X20 to step X25, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step X25), and all areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X26), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X2).
7). Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X2
8). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X29), and the process proceeds to step X30. In this embodiment, step X29
Then, model designation command, special figure 1 pending number command, probability information command, RAM initialization command (Display the customer waiting demo screen, and for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) R with light and sound
A command for notifying AM initialization), etc., are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with the effect number information command and general electric support, is also transmitted.

At step X30, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform processing to activate the circuit. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step X30, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X31). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
done by A. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial value random number (in the case of this embodiment, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the special figure (random number for the jackpot pattern, random number for the small hit pattern)) as the initial value (start value) of RWM After saving in the area (step X32), interrupts are permitted (step X33). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X34) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to destroy the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, and the small hit pattern random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number and small hit pattern random number are processed by the program as a timer interrupt process. CTC output with the same period (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing)
is a "slow counter" that is updated based on In addition, in the big hit pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step X34, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and data bus.
is set (step X35), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X3
6). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X36; N), the initial value random number update process (
Return to step X34). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step X33) before the initial value random number update process (step X34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step X34 may be performed in the main process as well as in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing.
This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X35 (step X37).
. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step X3
7; N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitor signal is on (step X36). In addition, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of times checked (step X37; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step X38
), the process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X39) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X40
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X41).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step X42) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum (step X43), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X44), it waits until the power supply of the game machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100), and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, , and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG.
timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1
01). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Then, output processing (step X104) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed based on output data set in various processes. When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X105) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, random number update processing 1 (step X106),
Random number update process 2 (step X107) is performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, setting the prize ball, Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X108) for monitoring errors such as opening of the front frame and glass frame, and illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a and the starting port 3 switch 97a
A starting switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring the winning of the game is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted based on the winning of game balls into the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, and the second starting winning opening 97. Then, the special figure 1 game processing (step X110) for performing processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) for performing processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display the desired content (step X112), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X113) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine whether there is an abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step X113) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality Monitoring process (step X1
14). Further, the external information editing process (step X115) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process ends.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the starting port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the timer interrupt process described above
will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 33, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, in the hardware random number acquisition process, it is determined whether or not there is starting opening winning information set when a jackpot random number is obtained based on winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493).

Based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36, when the starting opening winning information is not set (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. It should be noted that, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set. On the other hand, if the starting opening winning information is set based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step X494). And, when it is in the normal game state (step X494; Y)
goes to step X497. In addition, when not in the normal game state (step X494
;N) prepares a right-handed instruction notification command (step X495), and performs effect command setting processing (step X496). After that, prepare a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 (step X497), perform the special figure starting port 1 switch processing (step X498)
.

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification is performed by display, sound, or the like to instruct the player to hit right. During the specific game state or during the special game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right hand. When winning is detected during a game state, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Next, start-up 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step X49
9) Perform hardware random number acquisition processing (step X500), and determine whether or not there is starting entry winning information set when a jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning to the second starting winning entry 97 (
step X501).

Based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97, when the starting opening winning information is not set (step X501; N), the process proceeds to step X509. It should be noted that, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set. On the other hand, if the start-up winning information is set based on the winning of the second start-up winning port 97 (step X501; Y), the general electric power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, It is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (step X502), and if the normal electric power is in operation (step X502; Y), step X504. transition to On the other hand, if the utility power is not in operation (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the utility power fraud is occurring (step X503).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (eg, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred.
When there is a game ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If the electricity fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X509. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more. In addition, if the electric fraud is not occurring (step X503; N), it is determined whether it is in the normal game state (step X
504). And, when not in the normal game state (step X504; N), step X
Go to 507. Also, when the game is in the normal game state (step X504; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506). After that, prepare a table for setting information on hold by the starting port 2 (step X507), perform special figure starting port 2 switch processing (step X508), step X
509.

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the left-handed instruction notification is performed to instruct the player to hit left by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the left hand. I am trying to perform a hitting instruction notification.

Next, prepare a winning monitoring table for starting port 3 (second starting winning port 97) (step X509
), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X510). Then, in the hardware random number acquisition process, it is determined whether or not there is starting opening winning information set when a jackpot random number is obtained based on winning to the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning to the second starting opening winning opening 97 (step X511; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set. On the other hand, if the starting opening winning information is set based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step X512). Then, when not in the normal game state (step X512
;N) goes to step X515. In addition, when it is in the normal game state (step X
512; Y) prepares a left-handed instruction notification command (step X513), and performs effect command setting processing (step X514). After that, prepare a table for setting information on hold by the starting port 3 (step X515), perform special figure starting port 3 switch processing (step X5
16), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the left-handed instruction notification is performed to instruct the player to hit left by display, voice, or the like. In the normal game state, the left-hand shot is more advantageous for the player, and when the winning is detected in the normal game state at the second start prize-winning port 97 which is designed not to win unless the right-hand shot is won. He is trying to perform left-handed instruction|indication alerting|reporting.

[Special figure start gate 1 switch processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure starting opening 1 switch process (step X498) in the starting opening switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure start opening 1 switch process, first, the first start winning opening 3
6 is loaded to the control device external to the gaming machine 10 (step X521), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522). ), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523
). Then, if the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), save the updated value in the starting port signal 1 output count area of RWM (step X524), the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is less than the upper limit (step X525). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525.
Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but when the upper limit is stored, the value after updating is not saved because it loops and becomes 0 due to the +1 update.

If the special figure 1 pending number is less than the upper limit (here 4) (step X525; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the variation pattern in the special figure pending information determination process described later ( Step X526), update the special figure 1 pending number by +1 (step X527
). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is RW
Save in M's jackpot random number storage area (step X529).

Thereafter, a jackpot pattern random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). In addition, R
It is saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of WM (step X532). Subsequently, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). And special figure reservation information determination processing (step X
534), prepare a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations (step X535), perform the production command setting process (step X536), and end the special figure start port 1 switch process .

In addition, the special figure starting port 2 switch processing (step X
508), in steps X521 to X524 relating to the starter signal, except for processing the starter signal 2, which outputs information about the number of wins to the normal variable prize winning device 37 to the management device external to the gaming machine 10. The processing is the same as that shown in FIG. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and uses the predetermined random number as the first start memory. It constitutes a first start storage means capable of storing up to an upper limit number.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure reservation information determination process (step X534) in the special figure start port 1 switch process described above. The same processing is performed even in the special figure starting port 2 switch processing that omits illustration.
Special figure reservation information determination processing is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory.
In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (step X543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table is set (step X545), stop pattern information corresponding to the prepared big hit pattern random number is acquired (step X546), A prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value (
Step X547). Then, when the judgment result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop design information for the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop design command corresponding to the stop design information is prepared (step X551). Also, when the judgment result is not a small hit (step X548; N), set stop symbol information for losing (step X550), and prepare a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551).

After preparing a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551),
Effect command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, special figure 1 information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and special figure 1 variation pattern setting for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game Processing is performed (step X554).

Then, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game (step X555), and perform the effect command setting process. Do (step X556) and end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process in step X554 are the special figure 1 variation start processing of the special figure 1 normal processing, which is executed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game is similar to

By the above processing, including the look-ahead stop pattern command including the result of the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory, and the information of the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory A look-ahead variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is the special figure 1 variation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory It is possible to inform the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., and the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 can determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before starting the first variation display game based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means. Form a possible first determination means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). (determining whether or not)) constitutes a prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

In addition, this special figure reservation information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variation display game, and for the special figure 2 variation display game that does not generate the start memory for suspending the start of the special figure variation display game Not done. Further, when the game is in the fourth specific game state, the prefetching process may not be performed. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main during the fourth specific game state, and the special figure 1 variation display game is forced by deriving a special result in this special figure 2 variation display game. This is because in most cases, the process is stopped due to the result of deviation. In other words, most of the results are lost, so there is not much meaning in announcing the look-ahead result, and after announcing the look-ahead result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is forcibly changed to a lost result. This is because there may be a contradiction between

However, for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, no starting memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is generated, so during the first period of the 4th specific game state, as long as there is a special figure There is a high possibility that only one variable display game will be played, and in such a case, a look-ahead effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first starting memory for performing such a look-ahead effect, since the look-ahead processing is performed for the one that occurred before the start of the fourth specific game state, the result is used to generate after the start of the fourth specific game state. With respect to those which are the target of such a prefetching effect, the prefetching process is performed. Of course, the prefetching process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined in another process whether or not to perform the prefetching effect based on the result of the prefetching process.

[Special figure start gate 3 switch processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure starting opening 3 switch process (step X516) in the starting opening switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure start opening 3 switch processing, first, the second start winning opening 9
7 is loaded to the management device external to the gaming machine 10 (step X561), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562). ), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563
). Then, if the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal 3 output count area of RWM (step X564), and the starter 3 (
Second start winning port 97) Determines whether winning is invalid.

The starting gate 3 prize winning is invalid, while the special figure 1 variable display game that resulted in a special result (big hit or small win) is stopped (during the special figure display process described later), during the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. When this starting gate 3 prize winning is invalid (step X565; Y)
Ends the special figure start port 3 switch process. Also, if the starting gate 3 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), set the special figure 2 reservation number to 1 (step X566), calculate the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 (step X567 ), the jackpot random numbers prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process described above are saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the jackpot pattern random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, a small winning design random number is extracted and saved in the small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 3 switch processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100
constitutes a starting winning memory means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the second starting winning opening 97 . In addition, the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few types of variation patterns.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
In FIG. 37, special figure 1 game processing (step X110) in the timer interrupt processing described above
showed that. Toku-zu 1 To control the entire process related to the variable display game, to set the display of Toku-zu 1.
In this special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interrupted flag, which is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, is set (step Y100). If this special figure 1 interrupted flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 Performs processing related to the variable display game. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 interrupted flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is suspended, the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game of steps Y101 to Y118 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Y119. As a result, while the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variation display game does not progress (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display continues.

In step Y101, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit/minor win is in progress, that is, whether the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variation display game becoming a big win or a small win. (Step Y101). Then, if the special figure 2 big hit / small hit is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 ( Step Y103). Moreover, when it is during the big hit/minor hit of the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), it transfers to step Y103.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38, and the big winning opening is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning to the big winning opening. Processing for setting a winning hole count command and processing for closing the big winning hole when a specified number of prizes have been won in the big winning hole are performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a special winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state that is executed based on the result of the game becoming a big win or a small win, a big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119 and the subsequent processes are performed. In addition, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special Figure 1
Special figure 1 normal processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation
I do. At step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. 1 During fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, and setting each kind of big win. Special figure 1 display process (
Step Y110) is performed.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if the big hit round is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is "5", a process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round,
Large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 big hit end processing etc. is performed. At step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. Small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y1
15). At step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y116) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc. conduct.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during processing during the small winning, or ending the small winning Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small winning end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (
Step Y119), the symbol variation control process (step Y120) relating to the special figure 1 display device 51 is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. This special figure 1 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control relating to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game).

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
In FIG. 38, special figure 2 game processing (step X111) in the timer interrupt processing described above
showed that. In the special figure 2 game processing, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 2 display are performed. This special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 interrupted flag, which is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, is set (step Y130). If this special figure 2 interrupted flag is not set (step Y130; N), that is,
If the special figure 2 variation display game has not been interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y131, and subsequent processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 interrupted flag is set (step Y130; Y), that is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of steps Y131 to Y151 without
Move to step Y152. Thus, while the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 variation display game does not progress (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display continues.

In step Y131, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big win/minor win is in progress, that is, whether the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variation display game becoming a big win or a small win. (Step Y131). Then, if the special figure 1 big hit / small hit is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 ( Step Y133). Moreover, when it is during the big hit/small hit of special figure 1 (step Y131; Y), it transfers to step Y133.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38, and the big winning opening is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning to the big winning opening. Processing for setting a winning hole count command and processing for closing the big winning hole when a specified number of prizes have been won in the big winning hole are performed. In the special figure 2 game processing, a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a big winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the result of the game becoming a big win or a small win, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152 and the subsequent processes are performed. Also, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already timed up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 is determined (step Y135).

If the number of repetitions of this special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N)
, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), special figure 2
A long-variation timer value (here, 60000 ms) is saved in the game processing timer area (step Y151), and the processing from step Y152 onwards is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game with a high probability of occurrence of small hits in the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state is very long. (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times of timing using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of timing for the specified time (here, 60000 ms).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y),
The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (step Y136). Then, using the table, acquire the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number (step Y137
), a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y138).

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", monitor the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, set the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, set the effect, Figure 2
Special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139) to set information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation
I do. At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2 A process during fluctuation (step Y140) is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Special figure 2 display processing (
Step Y141) is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if the big hit round is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round,
A large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit end processing is performed. At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. Small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y1
46). At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. conduct.

At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during the small winning medium processing, or ending the small winning Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (
Step Y152), the symbol variation control process (step Y153) relating to the special figure 2 display device 52 is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is terminated. This special figure 2 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. In addition, it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, but in that case the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , which need not be judged here.

If the special figure 1 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing ends. Also, when the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), step Y
206. Also, if the left-handed instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N),
A left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (
step Y204). After that, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205),
It is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is
It is designed to be cleared when the second specific game state ends, and thereby, when shifting to the normal game state, left-handed instruction notification is performed.

And, when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), step Y217
transition to Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y206; N), prepare a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y207), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y208). After that, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for setting information about special figure 1 variation display game is performed (step Y210), and decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y211) , effect command setting processing is performed (step Y212). In addition, the process of preparing the decorative special figure pending number command (step Y21
0) At the time of performing, the special figure 1 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is not subtracted, and the reservation corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number minus 1 from the current special figure 1 reservation number I'm preparing some commands.

Next, set the special figure 1 changing in the special figure status area (addition of information) (step Y21
2). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure fluctuation display game, and is 0 to 5
is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variation display game is being performed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 indicates a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. It indicates that there is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether it is in the fourth specific game state (step Y213). And when it is in the 4th special game state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. Also, if it is not in the fourth specific game state (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 variation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is started in a state other than the fourth specific game state, and the special figure 1 variation display in the period when the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation It is possible to check the execution of the game. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuating processing transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 usual process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the end of the special game state from the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit or a small hit. It should be noted that while the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 2 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y221; N), save the special figure 2 normal processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and end the special figure 2 normal processing. Also, if the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (step Y222). In addition, as described above, special figure 2 reservation (second
Start memory), when there is a prize to the second start winning opening 97 in a state where the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started, it is temporary to start processing of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the winning It is not for suspending the start of the special figure fluctuation display game like the first start memory.

And, if the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (step Y222; N), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y223), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal game state (step Y227). If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y227; N), the process proceeds to step Y230. In addition, when it is in the normal gaming state (step Y227; Y), the special figure 2 variation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the period when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes irregular variation. As a result, it can be confirmed that the player is intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game, which is an irregular variation. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuating process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y231). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y232). Then, when the special figure 1 is not in fluctuation (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y233), and when it is not disclosed (step Y233; N), the customer waiting state Perform settings related processing. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y23
1; N), when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y232; Y) or when the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step Y233; Y), the process proceeds to step Y237.

In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y234), a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and a presentation is performed. Command setting processing is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without a backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the probability information command based on the change in the game state. It is possible to return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207, Y223). Thereby, the production control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production corresponding to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. can return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for returning to the performance corresponding to the game state when the performance control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
In FIG. 41, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step Y209) in special figure 1 normal processing described above
showed that. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, a drop lottery process for selecting a transition from the high probability state to the normal probability state is performed (step Y239), and a support management process for managing the period for setting the general electric support is performed (step Y240). Next, special figure 1 indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here special figure 1)
The variation flag is saved in the variation pattern discrimination area (step Y241), and the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the losing information, the big win information or the small win information as the result information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting process (step Y
243), perform a special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) for setting the special figure information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, and perform various settings related to the variation pattern setting of the special figure 1 variation display game Prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step Y245).

After that, special figure 1 to set the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game
A variation pattern setting process (step Y246) is performed, and a variation start information setting process (step Y247) for setting information of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. By these processes, the result and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. And after this, a process for adjusting so as not to cause inconvenience between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time, but when the special result (big hit or small hit) is derived on the one hand, the other is forcibly lost regardless of the lottery result. It ends as a result. In particular, since the special figure 2 variation display game has a high probability of becoming a small hit, if the special figure 2 variation display game stops first, there is a high possibility that such processing will be performed for the special figure 1 variation display game. . Therefore, for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game, even though the performance is highly expected, the game is forcibly stopped as a result of a failure, and the player has a sense of distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variation display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variation display game that is about to start, measures such as preventing the highly anticipated production from being selected are taken. I am making it possible.

For this reason, first, it is determined whether the fourth specific game state is in progress (step Y248), and if the fourth specific game state is in progress (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of the fourth specific game state, it is a state in which the game proceeds mainly with the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is short and it is executed at a high frequency, so it is known that the possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped due to a loss is high. , In the special figure 1 variable display game, since it is set in advance so as not to select an effect with a high degree of expectation, no special processing is performed here.

Also, if it is not in the fourth specific game state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating (step Y249). If special figure 2 is not fluctuating (step Y249
;N) goes to step Y257. In this case, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is started from now on, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game will be a very long variation time. Therefore, since the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped is low, the processing for preventing the selection of highly anticipated effects is not performed here.

If the special figure 2 is fluctuating (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is lost (step Y250), and if it is lost (step Y250; Y ) goes to step Y257. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is not a loss (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. Also, if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y)
goes to step Y257. In this case, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variation display game ends first, so that the highly expected effect is not selected. No processing.

Also, if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252
;N) calculates the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y253), and whether the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined (step Y254). If the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; Y)
goes to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends first, the processing for preventing the selection of highly expected effects is not performed.

In addition, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer. Prepare a command (step Y255), perform the production command setting process (step Y256), perform the fourth specific game state setting process for setting the fourth specific game state (step Y257), start the special figure 1 fluctuation End the process. This command also includes information as to whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. In the effect control device 300, based on receiving a command notifying that the variable time of the special figure 1 is longer, the selection of the highly expected effect for the special figure 1 variable display game is regulated and specific execution is performed. It is designed to perform processing such as setting the mode.

In addition, if the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (
Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step Y246) (first and second half fluctuation pattern number, etc.)
, and the effect control device 300 may change to a variation pattern in which the highly anticipated effect is not selected. In addition, in the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern,
The variable time may be left unchanged or may be changed. In addition, the processing (step Y255) for preparing a command to notify that the variation time of Toku-zu 1 is longer may be performed or may not be performed.

That is, special figure 1 variation pattern processing (step Y246
) determines the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal game state without referring to the variation mode information of the second variation display game. constitutes a first variation mode determining means capable of determining Furthermore, the process of resetting the variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means. is being executed, by referring to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information on the variation pattern is obtained without changing the determined variation time of the first variation display game. It constitutes a second variation mode determining means capable of re-determining.

In addition, instead of changing later the variation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246), the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246)
When determining the variation pattern in step Y25
4) may be performed to determine the variation pattern corresponding to the game situation from the beginning.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
In Figure 42, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal processing
showed that. This special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, a drop lottery process is performed to determine whether the high-probability state is to be changed to the normal-probability state (step Y259), and a support management process is performed to manage the period for setting the general electric support (step Y260). Next, special figure 2 indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here special figure 2)
The variation flag is saved in the variation pattern discrimination area (step Y261), and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the loss information, the big hit information or the small hit information as the result information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y
263), after performing the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, various kinds of setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step Y265).

After that, special figure 2 to set the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game
A variation pattern setting process (step Y266) is performed, a variation start information setting process (step Y267) is performed to set information on the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, and a fourth specific for setting a fourth specific game state The game state setting process is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, special figure 1 fluctuation display game and special figure 2 that can be executed at the same time
No adjustment processing is performed so as not to cause inconvenience between the variable display games. this is,
This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game is low, and the chance that the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly ended with a losing result is small. However, as in the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, the selection of highly expected effects may be restricted.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 43 shows the falling lottery process (steps Y239, Y259) falling lottery process performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this falling lottery process, first, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y581), and if it is not high probability (step Y581;
N) ends the drop lottery process. Moreover, when it is in high probability (step Y581; Y)
acquires a drop lottery random number (step Y582), refers to the determination value, and determines whether or not the drop lottery is won (step Y583).

If the drop lottery is not won (step Y583; N), the drop lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. In addition, when the fall lottery is won (step Y58
3; Y) performs processing for shifting to a low probability state. First, a signal relating to high-probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is O
Set to FF. Furthermore, the signal regarding the end of the high-probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF
F, set the special symbol 2 high probability state signal to OFF. Then, save the low probability number in the game state display number area (step Y586), and save the special figure low probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). As a result, the low probability state is set from the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won.

Next, a process for terminating the general electric support is performed. It is when the drop lottery is won in the third specific game state that the general electric support is terminated together with the win of the drop lottery. First, it is determined whether the general electric support is in progress (step Y588), and if it is not in the general electric support (step Y
588;N) terminates the drop lottery process. In addition, if it is during the general electricity support (step Y588; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game as the general electricity support is 0 (step Y589).

If the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y589; N), that is, if the specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure fluctuation display games have not been executed since the end of the special game state (in the case of the first specific game state) , the falling lottery process is terminated because the general electric support is continued after shifting to the second specific game state. Also, if the number of times of support is 0 (step Y589; Y), that is, the specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure fluctuation display games were executed from the end of the special game state, but the fall lottery was not won and the third If it is in the specific game state, in order to shift to the normal game state, the process of ending the general electric support after step Y590 is performed.

In the process of ending the general electric support, first, a signal regarding the end of working hours is saved in the external information output data area (step Y590). Here, the setting is made so that the big win 2 signal is turned off. Furthermore, the signal regarding the time-saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y591). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

Then, save the special figure low probability, no time saving number in the game state display number area (step Y
592), save the special figure low probability and no support flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y593). After that, normal pattern low probability is set (step Y594), and the falling lottery process ends. As a result, the low-probability state and general/universal electric support non-supported state are established, and the state shifts to the normal game state. Information on the end of the high probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs processing such as changing the production mode based on this information.

[Support management processing]
FIG. 44 shows the support management process (steps Y240, Y260) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this support management process, first, it is determined whether or not the general electric support is in progress (step Y1521), and if the general electric support is not in progress (step Y1521; N), the support management process ends. Also, if you are in the public electricity support (
In step Y1521; Y), if the support count that manages the execution count of the special figure fluctuation display game as general electric support is 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y1522), and the support count is 0.
(step Y1523).

If the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1523; N), that is, if the specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure fluctuation display games have not been executed since the end of the special game state (first specific game state or second specific If the gaming state continues), the support management process is terminated. Also, if the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1523; Y), that is, when a special figure variation display game exceeding the specified number (here, 100 times) is started from the end of the special game state,
When the special figure variation display game exceeding the prescribed number has already been executed since the end of the special game state, but the falling lottery is not won and the state is the third specific game state, it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step Y1524).

If it is in the high probability state (step Y1524; Y), the support management process is terminated because the transition to the third specific game state or the third specific game state continues. Also, if it is not in the high probability state (step Y1524; N), in order to end the second specific game state and shift to the normal game state, the process of ending the general electricity support after step Y1525 is performed.

In the process of ending the general electric support, first, a signal related to the end of working hours is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1525). Here, the setting is made so that the big win 2 signal is turned off. Furthermore, the signal regarding the time-saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1526). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

Then, save the special figure low probability, no time saving number in the game state display number area (step Y
1527), Save the special low probability, no support flag in the special game mode flag area (
Step Y1528). After that, normal pattern low probability is set (step Y1529), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1530), and left-handed instruction notification is performed at the start of the next special figure variation display game, support management processing exit. As a result, the second specific game state ends and the normal game state is entered.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In FIG. 45, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y
242). In this big-hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of RWM and prepared (step Y273), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1).

After that, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y
) moves to step Y279. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not it is a big hit according to whether or not the obtained big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y272 (step Y278 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. Then (step Y281), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In FIG. 46, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y
262). In this big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area is cleared to 0.

After that, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y
) goes to step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. Also, if it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) for determining is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Then (step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 47 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps Y276, Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this jackpot determination process, first,
A lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step Y311), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312
;N) determines whether it is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, if the high probability state (step Y313; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step Y314), determine whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316 ). Also, if it is not in a high probability state (step Y313; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step Y315), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316). .

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process ends. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316
; N), that is, if it is a big hit, set a big hit as the judgment result (step Y31
8), end the jackpot determination process.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 48 shows small hit determination processing (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first,
It is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y),
That is, if it is not a small hit, the determination result is set to be a loss (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the judgment is about the special figure 1 variation display game. (Step Y322).

And, when the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), set the small hit upper limit judgment value for special figure 1 (step Y323), the value of the target jackpot random number is the small hit upper limit judgment value It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Also, if you are not setting information for special figure 1 (
Step Y322; N), that is, if the determination is for the special figure 2 variation display game,
A small hit upper limit judgment value for special figure 2 is set (step Y324), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step Y326), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set a small hit as the judgment result (step Y327), and finish the small hit judgment process. do.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 49, the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step Y
243) was shown. In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), special figure 1
Load the jackpot pattern random number from the jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step Y3
32). Next, a special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design save area (
step Y334). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the reason why the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, a special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), a stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design pattern area (
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here special figure 1 indicator 51)
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped on the screen and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (step Y337), and the big winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired. special figure 1
It is saved in the special prize opening opening information area (step Y338). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit design Load the small winning pattern random number from the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y
340). Next, a special figure 1 small winning design table is set (step Y341), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small winning design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design saving area (step Y342). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design pattern area (step Y343), and the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step Y
346).

In addition, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern withdrawal area (step Y344), and the loss stop pattern pattern is special figure 1 stop. It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decoration special figure 1 command in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347
), effect command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 50, the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step Y
263). In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y
361; Y) loads the jackpot design random number from the special figure 2 jackpot design random number storage area (step Y362). Next, a special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y364). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, a special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), a stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design pattern area (
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, a special figure 2 indicator 52)
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped on the screen and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the big winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired. special figure 2
It is saved in the special prize opening opening information area (step Y368). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and if it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit design A small winning symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special figure 2 small hit design table is set (step Y371), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y3
72). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y373),
A decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern save area (step Y374), and the loss stop pattern pattern is special figure 2 stop. It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decoration special figure 2 command in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377
), effect command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
Based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game) to start the first change display game. It forms the first decision means that can be decided previously. In addition, the game control device 100,
A predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 97, and based on the predetermined random number, the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) and the variation mode information are displayed in the second It constitutes a second decision means capable of deciding before the start of the variable display game. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

As described above, the first starting winning port 36 is disposed at a position where the game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning port 97 launches to the other side of the game area 32. and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information on the variable time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and in the normal state (normal game state) The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is greater than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be a long time.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Examples include variation commands containing information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole special figure 1 game processing. Furthermore, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means as control information. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time according to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and when the measured time has passed the variation time It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, which is a low probability state, is a loss or a small hit, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set, but in this case, the fluctuation Information about time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a command indicating only long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of long fluctuation, it is only necessary to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the performance in detail, so the performance control device 300 starts the fluctuation display based on the reception of the command of the long fluctuation. The variable time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 based on the end of the variable time, and the variable display is stopped by the performance control device 300 upon receiving the stop command. make it In this way, the burden of control in the production control device 300 can be reduced.

[Fourth specific game state setting process]
FIG. 51 shows the fourth specific game state setting process (steps Y257, Y268) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this fourth specific game state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the general electric support is in progress (step Y1501), and if it is not in the general electric support (step Y1501; N), the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. do. In addition, if it is during the general electricity support (step Y1501; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that is the general electricity support is 0 (step Y150
2).

If the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1502; N), that is, if the specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure fluctuation display games have not been executed since the end of the special game state (first specific game state or second specific game state), the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. Also, if the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1502; Y), that is, a specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure fluctuation display games were executed from the end of the special game state, but the fall lottery was not won and the third If it is in the specific game state, it is determined whether the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503).

If the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is not a big hit (step Y1503;
N) ends the fourth specific game state setting process because the third specific game state continues. again,
When the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503; Y
) performs the process of ending the general electric support after step Y1504 in order to shift to the fourth specific game state.

In the process of ending the general electric support, first, a signal regarding the end of working hours is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1504). In this case, the big win 2 signal is set to be OFF. Furthermore, a signal regarding the end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1505). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

Then, save the special figure high probability, no number of time saving in the game state display number area (step Y
1506), save the special figure high probability, no support flag in the special figure game mode flag area (
Step Y1507). After that, the general pattern low probability is set (step Y1508), the fourth specific game state flag is saved (step Y1509), and the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. As a result, it becomes a high probability state and a general electric support non-state, and shifts to the fourth specific game state setting.

It should be noted that the fourth specific game state flag is a flag that is set to enable recognition of the fourth specific game state, and is cleared along with the start of the special game state. Since this 4th specific game state flag is not cleared even if the fall lottery is won during the 4th specific game state, the game state becomes a low probability state and no general electric support due to the fall during the 4th specific game state. It becomes possible to recognize that it is also in the fourth specific game state.

[Special figure 1 change process transition setting process]
In FIG. 52, the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process in the special figure 1 normal process (step Y21
6) was shown. In this special figure 1 process shift setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is set to ON. After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (special figure 1
The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of the display 51 is set (step Y606). Furthermore, the initial value is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y60
7), to end the process transition setting process during special figure 1 fluctuation.

The initial value to be set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize the start of the variable display by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 change process transition setting process]
In FIG. 53, the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process in the special figure 2 normal process (step Y23
0) was shown. In this special figure 2 fluctuation processing shift setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is set to ON. After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), flashing control timer in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area (special figure 2
The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking period timer of the display 52 is set (step Y616). Furthermore, the initial value is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y61
7), to end the process transition setting process during special figure 2 fluctuation.

The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variable pattern number area is 0, so that the variable display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize the start of the variable display by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

In addition, when starting the variable display in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, all the segments are started from the state of turning off, but it is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any of the result modes, or if there is a segment that is not used in any of the result modes, the variable display will be started from at least that segment being lit. You can make it work. Also, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is lit every time. Also, special figure 1
The lighting mode at the time of starting the fluctuation in the indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be the same or may be different.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 54, special figure 1 fluctuation process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above
showed that. In this special figure 1 fluctuation process, first, +1 update the number of times the design is fixed and output (step Y621), prepare by loading the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and perform the effect command setting process. (step Y623).

Next, prepare a decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y624), and perform production command setting processing (step Y625). In the game machine of the present embodiment, since there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 . Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms for a loss, 2000 ms for a big win, and 136 ms for a small win.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost (step Y627). If Toku-zu 1 is out (step Y627; Y)
goes to step Y647. Also, if the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y627;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y643. Also, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (step Y
628; Y) determines whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (step Y629). If it is not a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y629
; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, set the special figure 2 game interruption flag (step Y640), prepare the decoration special figure 2 interruption command (step Y641), Effect command setting processing (step Y642) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y643.

That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a small hit. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is a special game state based on a small hit (second special result) (
2nd special game state) is restarted with the end.

On the other hand, if it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y629; Y), it is determined whether special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y630). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the special result of the special figure 1 variation display game. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If the special figure 2 is being displayed during processing (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y632. In addition, if the special figure 2 is not being displayed during processing (step Y630; N), the number of times of design determination output is updated by +1 (step Y631), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y632). By setting the display time of special figure 1 + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 2, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, the display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, and the display time is newly started.

Next, save the display time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y633), prepare by setting the decorative special figure 2 loss pattern command (step Y634), and put the design command in the decorative special figure 2 command area The game is saved (step Y635), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y636). After that, prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y637
), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and processing transition setting processing 2 during special figure 2 display is performed (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning pattern command area (step Y643), and whether it is a special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit is determined (step Y644). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. Also, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (
Step Y644; N), that is, if it is a big hit, load information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y645), special figure 1 big winning opening information Information is loaded from the area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y646).

After that, load the information from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y647), and perform the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y648)
, To end the special figure 1 displaying process.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Processing]
In FIG. 55, special figure 2 during fluctuation processing (step Y140) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing
showed that. In this special figure 2 fluctuating process, first, +1 update the number of times the pattern is fixed and output (step Y651), prepare by loading the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and perform the effect command setting process. (Step Y653).

Next, prepare a decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y654), and perform production command setting processing (step Y655). Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). Here, 600 ms in the case of losing, 200 ms in the case of a big hit
A display time of 0 ms is set, and a display time of 136 ms is set for a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is lost (step Y657). If special figure 2 is off (step Y657; Y)
goes to step Y677. Also, if the special figure 2 is not lost (step Y657;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; Y), the process proceeds to step Y673. Also, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed (step Y
658; Y) determines whether it is a special figure 2 big hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (step Y659). If it is not a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y659
; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit, set the special figure 1 game interruption flag (step Y670), prepare the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (step Y671), Effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is a special game state based on a small hit (second special result) (
2nd special game state) is restarted with the end.

On the other hand, if it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the special result of the special figure 2 variation display game. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If special figure 1 is being displayed during processing (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Moreover, when special figure 1 displaying process is not in progress (step Y660; N), +1 is updated to the number of output times of design determination (step Y661), and the process proceeds to step Y663.

Next, save the display time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), prepare by setting the decorative special figure 1 lost pattern command (step Y664), and put the design command in the decorative special figure 1 command area The game is saved (step Y665), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y666). After that, prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y667
), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and processing shift setting processing 2 during special figure 1 display is performed (step Y669).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y673), whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit is determined (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, load information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675), special figure 2 big winning opening information Information is loaded from the area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y676).

After that, load the information from the special figure 2 stop design save area and save it in the special figure 2 stop design area (step Y677), and perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678)
, To end the special figure 2 display process.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1 (step Y648) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1, first, special figure 1 game process number "2" related to special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y681), processing number in special figure 1 game processing number area is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation in Toku-zu 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 during fluctuation signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684 ), to end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 fluctuation.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1 (step Y678) in the above special figure 2 changing process. In this special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1, first, special figure 2 game process number "2" related to special figure 2 displaying process is set (step Y691), processing number in special figure 2 game processing number area is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal related to the end of variation of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step Y694 ), to end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 fluctuation.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above special figure 2 changing process. In this special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y701), and the process number is placed in the special figure 1 game process number area is saved (step Y702).

Next, save the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

Up to this point, it is the same as the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display described above, and the information for setting the deviation result is performed. First, the deviation stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, clear the special figure 1 big winning opening information area (step Y707), small hit flag 1
The deviation information is saved in the area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y709). Then, clear the special figure 1 stop design save area (step Y710), save the deviation stop design number in the special figure 1 stop design area (step Y7
11), end the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 (step Y639) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the special figure 2 game process number area is processed. is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then the special figure 2 as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display device 52. The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y724).

Up to this point, it is the same as the process shift setting process 1 during the special figure 2 display described above, and the information for setting the deviation result is performed. First, the deviation stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, clear the special figure 2 big winning opening information area (step Y727), small hit flag 2
The deviation information is saved in the area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step Y729). Then, clear the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y730), save the deviation stop design number in the special figure 2 stop design area (step Y7
31), end the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display.

54 to 59 described above, when one special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (jackpot), the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result. Become. That is, based on the special result of the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result, and the special figure 2 variation display game is a special result. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of losing, and the second end control process is performed.

As described above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when performing the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) becomes the first special result, the first variation that is performing the execution control It is possible to end the display game as a result other than a special result, and the second
The variable display game execution control means determines that the first variable display game under execution control by the first variable display game execution control means is the first special result when the second variable display game is under execution control. In this case, it is possible to end the second variable display game for which execution control is being performed as a result other than the special result. As a result, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forced to stop with a losing result, so that even when simultaneous variations are performed, no problems occur. can be

[Special figure 1 display processing]
FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 show special figure 1 displaying processing (step Y
110) was shown. In this special figure 1 display process, first, load the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (
Step Y751), clear the small hit flag 1 area (step Y752).

Next, the big-hit flag 1 set in the big-hit flag 1 area in the big-hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the big-hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y
755;N) moves to step Y777. Moreover, when it is a big hit (step Y7
55; Y) is a test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the character continuous operation device operating signal is ON, special symbol 1
Win signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Then, prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step Y757), and perform the production command setting process (step Y758). That is, the abnormal fluctuation notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special game state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), the round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y760). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop pattern pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and the production command setting process is performed (step Y7).
63). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

Next, the big winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of this embodiment,
2 big win signals and 3 big win signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the information on the opening of the big winning opening and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms
) is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y771). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y7
74), save in special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Furthermore, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the process during special figure 1 display ends.

On the other hand, in step Y755, if special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N),
That is, when the big hit flag 1 is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y777). When the small hit flag 1 indicates a small hit (step Y777; Y), a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether the game is in the normal game state (step Y787).

If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y787; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, launch position designation signal 1
to OFF. Then, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left.

On the other hand, if the player is in the normal game state (step Y787; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.

After that, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the special figure 1 small winning fanfare medium processing transition setting Processing (step Y797) is performed, and the processing during special figure 1 display ends.

Also, in step Y777, if it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), clear (information subtraction) during special figure 1 fluctuation of the special figure status area (step Y806), special Fig. 1 Perform normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step Y807), special figure 1
End the display process.

[Special figure 2 display process]
FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 show special figure 2 displaying processing (step Y
141) was shown. In addition, during this special figure 2 display process, the processing equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 during display process is performed with special figure 2 as the target. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag 2 areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and if it is not a big hit (step Y
815;N) moves to step Y837. Moreover, when it is a big hit (step Y8
15; Y) is a test signal related to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the character continuous operation device operating signal is turned on, special pattern 2
Win signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step Y817), and perform the production command setting process (step Y818). That is, the abnormal fluctuation notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special game state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), the round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y8).
23). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

Next, the big prize opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of this embodiment,
2 big win signals and 3 big win signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the information on the opening of the big winning opening and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms
) is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y830), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y831). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y8
34), save in special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Furthermore, the fanfare/interval process shift setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the process during special figure 2 display ends.

On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N),
That is, when the big hit flag 2 is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y837). When the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (step Y837; Y), a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether the game is in the normal game state (step Y847).

If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y847; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, launch position designation signal 1
to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left.

On the other hand, if it is in the normal game state (step Y847; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.

After that, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the special figure 2 small winning fanfare medium processing transition setting Processing (step Y857) is performed, and the processing during special figure 2 display ends.

Also, in step Y837, if it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), clear (information subtraction) during special figure 2 fluctuation of the special figure status area (step Y866), special Fig. 2 Perform normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step Y867), special figure 2
End the display process.

That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the activation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the conditional device, based on the second special result of the variable display game. Eggplant.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
In Figure 64, fanfare /
The details of the interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776 and Y836) will be described. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big win (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y8).
71). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O
FF, special pattern 2 high probability state signal OFF, special pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF,
The special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special game mode is executed. Save the special figure low probability flag in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876).
As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

Next, save the information during the big hit in the special figure status area (step Y878), save the signal related to the right hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and save the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area. Save the number (step Y881).

After that, save the release flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y882), and clear the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number (step Y883). In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation count area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare/interval processing transition setting process is terminated. That is, along with the occurrence of the big hit, to clear all the information on the special figure 2 abnormal variation.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 65 shows the process transition setting process (step Y797) during special figure 1 small hit fanfare in the process during special figure 1 display described above. In this special figure 1 small winning fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" for small winning fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, with reference to the current game state, 1000 ms is set as the small win fanfare time in the case of the specific game state, and 4 ms is set as the small win fanfare time in the case of no specific game state. Then, a signal relating to the start of the small win is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special pattern 1 small hit signal is ON
set to

After that, save the information during the small hit in the special figure status information (step Y896), save the small hit display pointer in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and save the special figure 1
The process transition setting process during small hit fanfare is ended.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process]
FIG. 66 shows the process shift setting process (step Y857) during the special figure 2 small hit fanfare in the above-described special figure 2 display process. In this special-figure 2 small-hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process, first, "7" for the small-hit fanfare mid-process is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special-figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small winning fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, with reference to the current game state, 1000 ms is set as the small win fanfare time in the case of the specific game state, and 4 ms is set as the small win fanfare time in the case of no specific game state. Then, a signal relating to the start of the small win is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special pattern 2 small hit signal is ON
set to

After that, save the information during the small hit in the special figure status information (step Y906), save the small hit display pointer in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and save the special figure 2
The process transition setting process during small hit fanfare is ended.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
FIG. 67 shows fanfare/
Interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) is shown. In this fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y95).
1) Prepare a round command corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information and the number of rounds (step Y
952), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y953).

Next, the initial value of the big winning process control pointer corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big winning process control pointer area (step Y955). Then, the big winning gate opening time corresponding to the big winning gate opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957).
). The open time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959 ), and saves the opening time of the big winning opening in the special-figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (step Y962).

Then, the signal relating to the opening start of the big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y963). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38, the large prize winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y964), and the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening is counted. The mouth count number is cleared (step Y965), and the fanfare/interval process ends.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
FIG. 68 shows the process (steps Y112, Y143) during the opening of the big winning opening in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this process during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1005)
. If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command for the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. Also, if it is the final round (step Y100
5; Y) prepares an ending command for controlling the display of the ending display screen when the special game state ends (step Y1007), and performs effect command setting processing (step Y1008).

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009),
As the processing number, 5 is set for the large winning hole remaining ball processing (step Y1010). The remaining ball processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms or 1400 ms. and,
It is determined whether it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011).

If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1013). On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1
014), the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y10
15). After that, the OFF data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening ends.

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
FIG. 69 shows the big winning opening remaining ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this big winning hole remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041)
.

And if the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step Y
1041; N) saves a signal relating to the end of the opening of the big winning opening in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory in operation signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the current round number is set (step Y1043), and 3 for fanfare/interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is defined as a period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time, and from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, so the interval period is 2000 ms, and the interval performance is performed on the display device 41 etc. during this interval period. executed.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (step Y1
041; Y) performs jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045), sets ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y1046), and special figure 1 jackpot end processing or special figure 2 jackpot as the processing number. Set 6 for end processing (step Y1
047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (
Step Y1050), the big winning hole remaining ball processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ( Step Y1052), the big winning hole remaining ball processing ends.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the final round until the remaining ball processing time elapses and from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time until the ending time elapses. For example, if it is a special figure 1 large winning opening opening pattern 1, 14
Since the remaining ball processing time of 00 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms.

[Jackpot end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 70 shows the big hit ending process transition setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described big winning hole remaining ball process. In this jackpot end processing transition setting processing, first, a signal relating to the end of opening the big winning hole is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071).
. Here, the special electric accessory in operation signal is set to OFF.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1073). ), the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the information for the large winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information of the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening/closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 71 shows special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y11
4) was shown. In this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, first, "0" is set as a processing number relating to the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y1101), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1102).

Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y
1103). Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104).
. Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105),
Save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y110
6), clear the special figure status area (step Y1108). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1109).

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, the special figure variation display game can be started for both special figures 1 and 2, but in the timer interrupt process, special figure 2 game is performed after special figure 1 game processing. In order to carry out the processing, the processing for starting the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1109,
The start processing of the special figure 2 variation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. That is, until the game control device 100 enables the first variable display game execution control means to execute the processing related to the start of the first variable display game after the special game state ends.
The second variable display game execution control means constitutes game processing standby means for preventing the second variable display game start processing from being enabled.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special result is a variable probability big hit (step Y1110), and if it is a variable probability big hit (step Y1110; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1111). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

Next, save the high-probability, time-saving number in the game state display number area (step Y111
4), save the special figure high probability and the flag with support in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116). Furthermore, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1117), and the signal regarding the instruction to hit right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON.
Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1127).
), the initial value (here, the value corresponding to 100 times) is saved in the support count for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game that sets the general electric support (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 jackpot ends End the process.

On the other hand, if it is not a variable probability big hit (step Y1110; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

Next, save the low-probability, time-saving number in the game state display number area (step Y112
2), save the special figure low probability and the flag with support in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Furthermore, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1125), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON.
Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1127).
), the initial value (here, the value corresponding to 100 times) is saved in the support count for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game that sets the general electric support (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 jackpot ends End the process.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 72 shows special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y14
5) was shown. This special figure 2 jackpot end process is step Y11 in the special figure 1 jackpot process described above.
The processing is the same except that 09 is not performed. First, as a processing number related to special figure 2 normal processing, "
0" is set (step Y1131), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1132).

Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y
1133). Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134).
. Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135),
The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y113
6), clear the special figure status area (step Y1138). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special result is a variable probability big hit (step Y1110), and if it is a variable probability big hit (step Y1139; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1140). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal regarding the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

Next, save the number with high probability and short working hours in the game state display number area (step Y114
3), save the special figure high probability and the flag with support in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145). Furthermore, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1146), and the signal regarding the instruction to hit right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON.
Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156).
), the initial value (here, the value corresponding to 100 times) is saved in the support count for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game that sets the general electric support (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 jackpot ends End the process.

On the other hand, if it is not a variable probability big hit (step Y1139; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and short working hours state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

Next, save the low-probability, time-saving number in the game state display number area (step Y115
1), save the special figure low probability and the flag with support in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Furthermore, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1154), and the signal regarding the instruction to hit right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON.
Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156).
), the initial value (here, the value corresponding to 100 times) is saved in the support count for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game that sets the general electric support (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 jackpot ends End the process.

By these special figure 1 jackpot processing and special figure 2 jackpot processing, after the special game state based on the probability variable jackpot ends, the first specific game state with high probability state and general electric support is set. Also, after the end of the special game state based on the normal jackpot, a second specific game state with a low probability state and general electric support is set. That is, the game control device 100
It constitutes a probability setting means capable of setting a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the game will be the first special result of the special results is higher than that of the low probability state after the special game state is finished. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game state ends.

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the details of the minor winning fanfare process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in this small hit fanfare mid-process, first, prepare a small hit open command (step Y1
201), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1202). Next, the signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1203). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to ON. Then, the large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1204), and the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1205).

After that, 8 which is applied to the processing during the small hit is set as the processing number (step Y1206), and it is determined whether or not the small hit type is the small hit 1 (step Y1207). Small hit type is small hit 1
If (step Y1207; Y), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1208), save the small hit opening time 1 (here 48 ms) in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1209), and ends the processing during the small winning fanfare.

In addition, when the small hit type is not the small hit 1 (step Y1207; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1210), and the opening time corresponding to the small hit type is the special figure 2 game The game is saved in the processing timer area (step Y1211), and the small winning fanfare processing is terminated. As the opening time corresponding to the kind of small win, 1000 ms for 2 small wins, 1200 ms for 3 small wins, and 1600 ms for 4 small wins are set.

[Small hit medium processing]
FIG. 74 shows small hit middle processing (steps Y116, Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small hit middle process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y12
42). Next, the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1243), and 9 for small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y12).
44).

After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is the small hit 1 (step Y1245). If the small hit type is a small hit 1 (step Y1245; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1246), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 m
s) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1209), and the processing during the small hit is ended.

Also, if the small hit type is not small hit 1 (step Y1245; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1248), and the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type Save in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1249),
Finish the process during the small hit. As the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type, 600 ms is set for the small hit 2, and 800 ms is set for the small hit 3 or 4.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
FIG. 75 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; Y), set 10 for the special figure 1 small hit end process as the processing number (
Step Y1272), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y
1273). Next, save the small hit ending time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (
Step Y1274), and shift to step Y1278.

Also, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; N), set 10 for the special figure 2 small hit process as the processing number (step Y1275), and set the processing number to the special figure 2 game processing number area Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Even if it is a special figure 1 or a special figure 2, the setting of the small winning ending time (steps Y1274, Y1277) refers to the current game state, and if it is a specific game state, the small winning ending 1200 ms or 1400 ms is set as the time, and 100 ms is set as the small winning ending time when the game is not in the specific game state. As a result, the length of the ending period, which is the combination of the remaining ball processing time and the ending time, is 2000 ms in the specific game state, and 700 ms or 900 ms in the non-specific game state.

Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory in operation signal is set to OFF. Furthermore, the big winning hole count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing ends.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
In FIG. 76, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y11
8) was shown. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 for special figure 1 normal processing is set as a processing number (step Y1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1306 ). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether it is in the normal game state (step Y1307), and if it is not in the normal game state (step Y1307; N), the process proceeds to step Y1310. Also, if the game is in the normal game state (step Y1307; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to O
Set to FF. Then, save the number in the left-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and determine whether the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted (step Y1
310).

If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (step Y1310; N), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value Save the value (here 2) corresponding to (step Y1314), and end the special figure 1 small hit end processing. Also, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (step Y1310; Y), prepare a decoration special figure 2 resume command (step Y1311) and perform production command setting processing (step Y1312). After that, special figure 2
Clear the game interruption flag area (step Y1313), save the value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value (step Y13
14), end the special figure 1 small hit end processing.

As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variation display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game. In addition, by saving the value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value, the start processing for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process. The FIG. 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y14
9) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 for special figure 2 normal processing is set as a processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and clear the special figure status area (step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step Y1337), and if it is not in the normal game state (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. In addition, when the game is in the normal game state (step Y1337; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to O
Set to FF. Then, save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and determine whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted (step Y1
340).

When the special figure 1 variation display game is not being interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit ending process is terminated. Also, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (step Y1340; Y), prepare a decoration special figure 1 restart command (step Y1341) and perform production command setting processing (step Y1342). After that, clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area (step Y1
343), end the special figure 2 small hit end processing. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variation display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device 100 controls the execution of the first variable display game (game control device 1
00) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100), the execution of one of the variable display games is controlled by the variable display game execution control means.
When the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means results in a special result, the one variable display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the other variable display game is entered. It constitutes restart control means capable of executing restart control for restarting one of the variable display games that has been interrupted after the end of the game.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 78 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 78, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, allow generation of display data (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness of the LED and liquid crystal, the volume, etc., and the LED
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of the liquid crystal, the volume, etc. is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, the V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44, a board effect setting process (step C20) for controlling the effect, and a process for clearing the WDT (step C8). ).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 79 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (
Step C201), determine whether or not the command reception count is 0 (step C202)
. If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, copy the contents of the received command buffer to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, the command (data
can be moved to create space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the number of command copies corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
Return to the process of step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 80 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
Then, it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23
4).

In addition, when it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
At step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235
At ;Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
At step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during a big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during a small win. and MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big-hit command (step C237; Y), the big-hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

Further, when it is determined at step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), symbol-based command processing (
Step C240) is performed to terminate the received command analysis process.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (
At step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the pending number command and the error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-time commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
At step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined at step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. Also, in step C245,
If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N)
, the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Processing of variable commands]
FIG. 81 shows the variable command processing (step C2) in the received command analysis processing described above.
36) was shown. In this variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undecided (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the symbol system command process described above.

If this special figure type is undecided (step C361; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, check the combination of the variation command and the symbol command (
Step C362), it is determined whether the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C
363).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3
63;N) determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a losing symbol, a 10R big hit symbol, a 4R big hit symbol, and a small winning symbol. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is when the variation command (variation pattern command) is received, but the symbol command of the 10R jackpot symbol is received. It means that it is a contradictory combination (combination of variation command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variable performance setting process for setting information for performing performance corresponding to the variable command is performed (step C365).

Next, the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is set to special figure fluctuation (step C366
). Here, "during special figure fluctuation" means that the special figure is fluctuating (not during a demonstration waiting for customers, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Furthermore, if the number of look-ahead effects (the number of times of look-ahead execution) is not zero, the number of look-ahead effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of look-ahead effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process ends.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 82 shows the variable effect setting process (step C365) in the variable command process described above.
)showed that. In this fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type is reachless fluctuation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (
Step C381; Y) sets the model code, the special figure type, and the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the production mode at that time (step C382). Note that the production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300, and naturally differs depending on the model,
There is a normal mode and a variable mode here. Furthermore, a plurality of modes are provided in each mode in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is obtained (step C383).
. As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effect that appears during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half advance notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. A lottery for the advance notice that appears in .

Next, the advance notice effect of the second half fluctuation is drawn by lottery. In addition, the second half of the special figure fluctuation display game is the so-called reach action (for example, the display area excluding the specific area of the multiple rows of the special figure display area is a big hit). is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half variation of the special figure variation display game is the variation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the late notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half advance notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table.
Then, referring to the second half advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for the notice to appear is performed (step C389).
).

After that, determine the contents of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT (step C390),
The content of the presentation corresponding to the result of the preliminary announcement lottery is determined (step C391). As a result, the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the production and notice such as the main reach content are determined. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol by referring to the variation pattern of the determined special figure variation display game (such as a ready-to-win effect), the content of the notice, and the game state is performed (step C392).
).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (
Step C394). By these processes, it is possible to execute the effect and notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, setting is made to reduce the decoration starting memory display corresponding to the reduction of the corresponding starting memory when starting the special figure variation display game.

Then, set the sound number, which is the BGM number, the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp, etc. (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (variation display of identification information) Display settings are made (step C397). Furthermore, in order to set the variable display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decorative special symbol variable display game separately from the variable display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variable corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , ends the variable effect setting process.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 83 shows single-shot command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261).
. When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model specifying command (step C261; Y), model setting processing is performed to rewrite the internal information with model information corresponding to the command (step C262), and single command processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), RA indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized
It is determined whether it corresponds to the M initialization command (step C263). and M.
If it is determined that the ODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263
In ;Y), RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and R
Sets the AM initialization screen information. Furthermore, scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to perform an effect when the RAM is initialized.

If it is determined at step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE is set to a power failure recovery command indicating recovery from a power failure without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether they correspond (step C265). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to a power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the one-shot command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. In addition, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to a power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a customer waiting demonstration command indicating the start of a customer waiting demonstration. (step C267). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y),
A customer waiting demonstration process is performed (step C268), and the single command process is terminated. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set for the customer waiting effect.

Also, in step C267, when it is determined that MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether MODE is special figure 1 pending (
Step C269). And when MODE is special figure 1 pending (step C269; Y
), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process for performing processing such as displaying the decoration start memory display corresponding to the generated reservation on the display device 41 is performed (step C270), and the single-shot system command processing is completed. Also, in step C269, when it is determined that MODE does not correspond to special figure 1 suspension (step C269; N), it is determined whether MODE is special figure 2 suspension (step C271). Then, if MODE is special figure 2 pending (step C271; Y), special figure 2 pending information setting process is performed to perform processing corresponding to the occurrence of pending (step C2
72), and terminates the one-shot command processing. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a starting memory display means for performing a starting memory notification display for displaying information about the starting memory by a starting memory display (decorative starting memory display) corresponding to each starting memory.

Also, in step C271, if MODE is not special figure 2 pending (step C271; N
), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). and mods
If E is probability information (step C273; Y), a probability information setting process for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot command process ends.

Also, in step C273, if MODE is not probability information (step C273; N)
Then, it is determined whether the MODE is error/illegal (step C275). and MO
If the DE is error/illegal (step C275; Y), error/illegal setting processing is performed (step C276) to perform corresponding processing such as error notification, and the one-shot command processing ends. In the error/injustice setting process (step C276), notification processing when a command related to error or injustice is received, warning display processing when a right-handed instruction notification command or left-handed instruction notification command is received, etc. are performed. .

Also, in step C275, if the MODE is not error/illegal (step C275;
N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). And when MODE is production mode switching (step C277; Y), production mode switching processing for switching the production mode is performed (step C278), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated.

Also, in step C277, if MODE is not production mode switching (step C277
;N), it is determined whether the MODE is symbol stop (step C279). and M.
If the ODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. If the MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether it is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is intended for the special figure currently fluctuating.

If the command is not a normal command (step C280; N), the one-shot command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C281), and if all symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , terminates the single-shot command processing. Thereby, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as during fluctuation, during big hit, during small hit, etc., and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Jackpot command processing]
FIG. 84 shows the jackpot command processing (step C
238). In this jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether the MODE is fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, if the MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare effect setting processing is performed, such as setting a fanfare display image according to the type of big win or small win, and adding the value of the number of consecutive times display section 96. (Step C402), the P machine state is set to fanfare (Step C403), and the big win system command processing is terminated.

If MODE is not fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. If the MODE is round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the round number display information is performed (step C405), the P machine state is set to be in a round (step C406), End the jackpot command processing.

If MODE is not round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is interval (step C407). That is, it determines whether the received command is an interval command relating to the interval between rounds. When the MODE is interval (step C407; Y), interval performance setting processing for setting the performance during the interval is performed (step C408), the state of the P machine is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is won. End system command processing. If MODE is not interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command relating to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small win.

When MODE is ending (step C410; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect at the end of a big hit or a small win is performed (step C4
11), the P machine state is set to ending (step C412), and the big win system command processing is terminated. Also, if MODE is not the ending (step C410; N),
It is determined whether MODE is count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on the winning to the special variable winning device.

If the MODE is not count (step C413; N), the jackpot system command processing is terminated. If the MODE is count (step C413; Y), count effect setting processing (step C414) for setting the effect corresponding to the winning to the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit command processing ends.

By the processing in the production control device 300 as described above, the production corresponding to the production state as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 and the production display on the display device 41 as shown in FIG. .

[First modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. Basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof are omitted, and different portions are mainly described. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the allocation of the variation time for the special figure variation display game that is a big hit started in the third specific game state ST4.

In this modification, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 85 is used instead of the variation pattern allocation when the result is a big hit in the third specific game state shown in FIG. 28(c). In the distribution of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 85, the distribution differs depending on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game executed after the end of the special game state.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when it is the 101st to 150th game after the end of the special game state,
That is, within 50 games from the start of the third specific game state, the variation pattern with the shortest variation time of 150000 ms is selected at the highest rate.
Also, as shown in FIG. 85(b), if it is the 151st to 200th game after the end of the special game state, that is, if it is the 51st to 100th game from the start of the third specific game state, the variation time is second. The variation pattern of 250000 ms, which is the shortest, is selected at the highest rate.

Also, as shown in FIG. 85(c), if it is the 201st to 250th game after the end of the special game state, that is, if it is the 101st to 250th game from the start of the third specific game state, the variation time is the third. The variation pattern of 300000 ms, which is the shortest, is selected at the highest rate. Then, as shown in FIG. 85(d), if it is after the 251st game after the end of the special game state, that is, if it is 251st game or more after the start of the third specific game state,
A variation pattern of 450000 ms, which has the longest variation time, is selected at the highest rate.

That is, the greater the number of games executed in the third specific game state, the higher the rate at which a longer variation time is selected. The longer the variation time is selected, the longer the stay period of the fourth specific game state is, and the more prize balls can be obtained, so the long-term stuck state in which a big win is not derived despite the high-probability state is long. The more profit can be given to the player. As a result, the dissatisfaction that a big hit is not derived can be eliminated. On the other hand, it is possible to provide the player with an amusement which is not found in the conventional game machines, in which the player expects the player to be stuck for a long period of time.

Note that the distribution shown in FIG. 85 is just an example, and it is possible to arbitrarily set the division of the number of games in which the table is changed, the distribution of the fluctuation time in each table, and the like. In order to obtain the above effect, the longer the stay time in the third specific game state is, the higher the selection rate of the long variation time for the special figure variation display game that will give a big hit. For example, the longer the cumulative execution time of the special figure variation display games executed in the third specific game state, the higher the selection ratio of the long variation time for the special figure variation display games that will result in a big hit.

Conversely, the longer the staying time (the number of games or the execution time) of the third specific game state is, the lower the selection rate of the long variation time for the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit. By doing so, a privilege can be given to a player who has been able to derive a special result early. In addition, the selection rate of the long variation time may be set to be the highest for the special figure variation display game in which the big win is achieved when the duration of stay in the third specific game state is within a predetermined range.
For example, the selection rate of the long variation time may be the highest for the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit when it is 101 to 250 games from the start of the third specific game state. Also, a plurality of such periods may be provided. In this way, an advantageous period and an unfavorable period can be provided in the third specific game state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning port 97), and the result of the variable display game is a special result, in a gaming machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player, a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for controlling the game, and a starting prize opening 1 start prize winning port 36 and start prize winning port can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes and an open state in which game balls can easily win prizes, and the right to execute a variable display game is generated by winning a prize. A possible normal variable winning device 37, and a second starting winning port arranged at a position downstream of the normal variable winning device 37 and allowing winning via a winning path to the normal variable winning device
A start winning port 97 is provided, and the control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than in the first operating state. Control is performed in an operating state, and a probability state in which the result of the variable display game is a special result is set to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state, and the first start winning port 36 or normal A first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 37, and a second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 97. death,
The first variation display game and the second variation display game can be executed at the same time, and in the high probability state, the execution time of the variation display game is set to be shorter than in the low probability state, and the special result depends on the game state. There are a first special result whose derived probability can be changed and a second special result whose derived probability is constant regardless of the game state, and the second special result is derived in the second variable display game. The probability that the first special result is derived is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived, and when the result of the variable display game is the first special result, the first special game state is advantageous to the player.
A special game state is executed, and when the result of the variable display game is the second special result, the second special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the second special game state is executed in a high probability state and a second operation state. In a certain case, when a variable display game with a special result is executed, the transition is made to the first operation state, and the execution time of the variable display game is set to the number of executions of the variable display game from the end of the previous special game state. The selection is made accordingly. Therefore, the profit given to the player can be varied according to the number of times the variable display game has been executed since the end of the special game state,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. Basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof are omitted, and different portions are mainly described. The game machine of this modified example differs in the transition of the game state.

FIG. 86 shows the transition of the game state in this modified example. In this modification, the third specific game state ST
4 is not set, and when the falling lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2 and the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the special result, the fourth specific game state ST
Go to 5. Then, when the fall lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, when the variable probability big hit is derived in the fourth specific game state ST5, it shifts to the first specific game state ST2 after the special game state, and when the normal jackpot is derived, the special game state is followed by the second specific game state. It is designed to shift to ST3.

FIG. 87 shows the variation pattern selected in the fourth specific game state ST5 of this modification. FIG. 87(a) is a variation pattern of a special figure variation display game in which the result is a loss and the fall lottery is not won, and FIG. 87(b) is a case in which the result is a small hit and the fall lottery It is a variation pattern of a special figure variation display game that does not win. In both cases, the variation time is shortened compared to the normal game state. Further, as shown in FIG. 87(c), the same variable time is set for the special figure variable display game in which the result is a loss or a small hit and the drop lottery is won, and a common specific effect is performed. executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87(d), for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a big hit, 20000 ms is required if the fall lottery is not won for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is irregular fluctuation. When the falling lottery is won, 10000 ms is set, and when the result is a loss or a small hit, a common specific performance is set as when the falling lottery is won. In addition, 10000 ms is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is the main fluctuation, regardless of whether the fall lottery is won or not, and if the result is lost or a small hit, the fall lottery is won. A specific effect is set.

The variation time of the special figure variation display game that wins the falling lottery is shorter than the variation time of the special figure variation display game (refer to FIG. 28) that results in a big hit in the normal game state ST1. Therefore, when the special figure variation display game winning the fall lottery is started first or simultaneously, the special figure variation display game winning the fall lottery is always finished first. As a result, at least when the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery is started first or is started at the same time, the effect contents can be determined without referring to the fluctuation time of both special figure fluctuation display games, and the processing is simplified. can be

In addition, the fall lottery is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the fluctuation pattern is determined after that. Strictly speaking, it is a variation pattern selected in the case of the normal game state ST1, but for ease of understanding, it will be explained as a variation pattern in the fourth specific game state ST5.

FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 show how the effect is executed when the fourth specific game state ST5 ends. FIG. 88(a) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is lost. In the state of the fourth specific game state ST5, a small hit RUSH effect is set. In this fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variation display game (t7
1, t72). Also, when a small hit is derived with a high probability and a small hit is derived (t7
3), the second special game state is entered (t73 to t76), and the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t7
4 to t75) are performed.

Then, when a new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the falling lottery is won, the probability state is changed to the low probability state (t76), and the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. For the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, a certain time (here, 10000
ms) is set (t76-t77), and the first specific effect is performed during execution of this special figure variation display game. After the end of this special figure variation display game, the normal mode effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is performed (t78).

In addition, in the continuous count display unit 96, until the end of the special figure variation display game in which the falling lottery is won, the state of displaying the number of hits up to that point (three times in this case) is maintained, and the special figure variation display game is performed. When the game ends, the display is ended and the number of big hits is cleared to zero. i.e.
At the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery, the normal game state is shifted to ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but at this time the display is maintained and the relevant The display is ended with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fact that the winning of the falling lottery is known in advance.

FIG. 88(b) shows a case where the falling lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit. Also in this case, as in FIG. 88 (a), when a new special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started, the fall lottery is won, and the probability state is set to a low probability state (t81), and the game state is normal. It becomes game state ST1. A constant time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the variation time for the special figure variation display game that will result in a big hit (t81 to t82). During execution of this special figure variation display game, a first specific effect is performed (t81 to t83). Then, after the special figure variation display game is finished, the first special game state is set and the first special game effect is performed (t83). note that,
When the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, regardless of whether or not the falling lottery is won, a fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the variable time, and the first specific performance is executed.

In addition, in the consecutive times display section 96, the state of displaying the number of big hits (three times in this case) until the end of the special figure variation display game in which the drop lottery is won is maintained. In this example, since the special figure variation display game is a big win, the number of big wins is updated by +1 when the special figure variation display game ends. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that wins the fall lottery, the normal game state ST1 is entered, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this time. be. Furthermore, in this case, since the big hit is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery and the condition for starting the specific period is established, the number of big wins before shifting to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and added as a specific case. I am trying to do As a result, it is possible to prevent the accumulated game information from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, and prevent the loss of interest in the game.

FIG. 89(a) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit. Also in this case, as in FIG. 88 (a), when the new special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started, the fall lottery is won, and the probability state is set to a low probability state (t91), and the game state is normal. It becomes game state ST1. A fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the variable time for the special figure variable display game that wins the drop lottery (t91 to t92). During execution of this special figure variation display game, a first specific effect is performed (t91 to t93). When this special figure variation display game ends, it becomes a second special game state (t93), but the first specific effect is continued even in this second special game state (t93-t94). After that, when the second special game state ends, the normal mode is entered (t94).

In addition, in the continuous number display section 96, the state of displaying the number of big hits (three times in this case) is maintained until the special figure variation display game in which the falling lottery is won is finished and the second special game state is finished. Then, when the second special game state ends, the display ends and the number of big wins becomes 0.
cleared. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that wins the fall lottery, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this time. , The display is maintained even in the second special game state based on the small hit derived in the special figure variation display game. When the second special game state ends, the display ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fact that the winning of the falling lottery is known in advance.

FIG. 89(b) shows a case where a drop lottery is won in a special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit, and a special figure variation display game in which a big win is started during execution of the special figure variation display game. The case is shown. Also in this case, as in FIG. 88 (a), when a new special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started, the falling lottery is won, and the probability state is set to a low probability state (t111), and the game state is normal. It becomes game state ST1. A certain time (here, 10000ms) is set as the variable time for the special figure variable display game that wins the falling lottery (t111 to t113).
, During execution of this special figure variation display game (t111 to t114) and during the second special game state (t
114 to t115), the first specific effect is performed. The contents of this first specific effect are shown in FIG.
) is the same as the first specific effect shown in FIG.

In this example, the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit is started during execution of the first specific effect (t112). Along with this, a second specific effect for suggesting and announcing the start of the special figure 1 variable display game that will be a big hit is added to the first specific effect and started (t112). The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t114), after which the second special game state is entered.

The special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted with the derivation of the small hit in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t1
13 to t115), the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special game state (
t115). If the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is not executed, FIG. 89(a)
As shown in (t
115-116). As a result, it is possible to suggest or inform the player that the player will win a big hit, and prevent the player from quitting the game due to winning the falling lottery. After that, with the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the first special game state is entered (t117).

Further, in the consecutive times display section 96, the number of big hits up to that point (three times in this case) is displayed even in the second special game state after the special figure variation display game in which the falling lottery was won in the same manner as in FIG. 89(a). state is maintained. After that, the game is temporarily hidden, but when the special figure variation display game for the big win ends, the game is restarted with the number of big wins updated by +1. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that wins the fall lottery, the normal game state ST1 is entered, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this time. be. Furthermore, when the special figure variation display game started before the special figure variation display game ends, the number of big wins before shifting to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and added. This special figure variation display game to be a big win is a special figure variation display game to be a big win started before the end of the special figure variation display game in which the drop lottery is won. This will
It is possible to prevent the accumulated game information from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, and prevent the decline in interest in the game.

As described above, by performing the first specific effect in the case of winning the drop lottery or in the case of a big win, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of either a transition to a low probability or the derivation of a big win, which have significantly different values for the player. It is possible to inform the player of the situation and give the player a sense of uneasiness and anticipation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, when a special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is started during the execution of the first specific performance, the falling lottery is won by the first specific performance by performing the second specific performance or the third specific performance. is reported, the player can be notified of the possibility of a big win, and the player can be prevented from quitting the game due to falling.

In addition, if the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery becomes a big hit, or if the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit starts before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery, the result will be Even if the time of derivation is the normal game state ST1, it is treated in the same way as the big win derived in the specific game state, and the value of the continuous number display part 96 is added by taking over the number of big wins before shifting to the normal game state ST1. I'm trying As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies with the players who still recognize that they are in the specific game state due to the execution of the first specific performance, the second specific performance and the third specific performance, and prevent the decrease in interest in the game. can do.

FIG. 90 shows an example of display on the display device 41. FIG. In FIGS. 90(a) to (g),
An example of the first specific performance that is executed when the drop lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5 or when the jackpot is won is shown. When the special figure 2 variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the variation display is started in the first decoration special figure 2 game display section 85b and the second decoration special figure 2 game display section 88b. , the first specific effect is started. This first specific production is
The effect is that the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight, and the result of the special figure variation display game and the presence or absence of the fall lottery are announced according to the result of the battle.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), an effect in which the characters fight is performed, and the result of the fight is shown when the variable time is over. If the result is a loss in the special figure variation display game in which the drop lottery is won, the teammate character 89a loses as shown in FIG. 90(c). In addition, the result mode of losing is also displayed in the first decoration special figure 2 game display section 85b and the second decoration special figure 2 game display section 88b.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90(d), a shutter display 93, which is a display imitating a shutter, is displayed.
is closed, and the shutter display 93 is completely closed as shown in FIG. The number of times of big hits, which has been reported by the number of times display section 96, is reported. In other words, the shutter display 93 constitutes an image informing that the falling lottery has been won. Then, normal game state ST1
Move to the effect display of .

In addition, if the result is a small hit in the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery, FIG. 90 (
As shown in c), the teammate character 89a is defeated, and the result mode of the small hit is displayed in the first decorative special figure 2 game display section 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display section 88b. After that, the second special game state is entered with the display of FIG. 90(c), and the displays of FIGS. 90(d) and (e) are performed at the end of the second special game state.

Regardless of whether or not the falling lottery is won, if the result is a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game, after the character fights as shown in FIG. The result is that character 89a wins. In addition, the result mode of the big hit is displayed in the first decoration special figure 2 game display portion 85b and the second decoration special figure 2 game display portion 88b. After that, the special game state is started.

When the result is a big win, the number of big wins displayed on the continuous number display section 96 is updated by +1, and is updated from 3 times shown in FIG. 90(b) and the like to 4 times. When the fall lottery is not won in the special figure variation display game as a big hit, the big win is in the fourth specific game state ST5, and the big win occurs during the specific period of accumulating the game information, so the number of consecutive times display part 9.
The value of 6 is updated by +1.

In addition, when the falling lottery is won in the special figure variation display game that is a big hit, the state is temporarily shifted to the normal game state ST1, but as an exceptional specific case, even if the big hit is 1 in the normal game state ST1. The result of addition up to that point is taken over and added without being counted as the second time. As described above, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the falling lottery was won, the first specific effect is performed to suggest or notify that the falling lottery has been won, but in the case of a big hit, it is clear that the player has fallen. Since the player does not clearly grasp that he or she has won the falling lottery, the addition result up to that point can be taken over and added to provide a comfortable notification.

In addition, when the falling lottery is not won and the result is a loss or a small hit in the special figure variation display game, the first specific effect may be performed as a so-called fake effect. In this case, FIG. 90 (d
90(g), the game is drawn as shown in FIG. 90(g). In addition, the first decorative special figure 2 game display section 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display section 88b also display the result mode of losing or small hit.

FIG. 91 shows an example of the second specific effect and the third specific effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 89(b), an example of the case where the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit is shown, but the same applies when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss. As shown in FIG. 91(a), the special figure 2 variable display game in which the fall lottery was won is started, the first specific effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 91(b), during the execution of this first specific effect When the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit is started, a band 94 displaying "Warning!!" is displayed as the second specific effect so as to be superimposed on the front side of the first specific effect. This band 94 is also displayed when the result is shown in the first specific effect as shown in FIG. ing.

As shown in FIG. 91(d), the band 94 is not displayed during execution of the second special game state. and,
When the second special game state ends and the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit is restarted, FIG.
As shown in (e), as the third specific effect, a band 95 reading "Standby for extreme heat!!" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 91(f), the shutter display 93 opens and the normal mode effect can be seen.
continues to be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 91(h), the jackpot result mode is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 91(i), the first special game state is entered.

The display of the number of consecutive times display portion 96 temporarily ends when the normal mode effect, which is the effect of the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. The display starts when the game state is rendered. Here, in the case where the special figure variation display game started before the end of the special figure variation display game that wins the drop lottery becomes a big win, the number of big wins before the fall is once transferred to the normal game state ST1. , and has been updated from 3 times before the fall to 4 times. Although the display of the number of consecutive times display portion 96 is temporarily terminated when the normal mode effect is entered, the display may be continued here as well. Thereby, it is also possible to suggest or notify that there is a possibility of a big hit.

In addition, although the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed in a strip shape, other displays may be used. Also, the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed so as to overlap in front of the first specific effect, but instead of the first specific effect, the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed. Also good. Alternatively, only one of the second specific effect and the third specific effect may be performed.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning port 97), and the result of the variable display game A gaming machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, includes control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for controlling the game, and the control means is the second When it is decided to change the game state in accordance with establishment of one condition, a first specific effect for notifying the change in the game state can be executed, and the second condition is established during the execution of the first specific effect. When it is decided to change the game state due to the fact that the second condition is satisfied, in addition to the first specific effect or instead of the first specific effect, a second notification of the change in the game state due to the establishment of the second condition It means that the specific effect can be executed. Therefore, after the start of the first specific effect, the second
Even when the condition is established, the change of the game state based on the establishment of the second condition can be reported, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, a first start-up opening (first start-up opening 36, normal variable winning apparatus 37) and a second start-up opening (second start-up opening 97) are provided, and the control means controls the first start-up A first variation display game is executed as a variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the opening, a second variation display game is performed as the variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening, and the first variation is executed. The display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time.
When it is determined that the condition is established and the game state is changed, a first specific effect for notifying the change in the game state can be executed, and during the execution of the first specific effect, the other variable display game is executed. When it is decided to change the game state by establishing the second condition along with the execution, the first
In addition to the specific effect or instead of the first specific effect, it is possible to execute the second specific effect of notifying the change in the game state accompanying the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, even when the second condition is established after the first specific effect is started, the change in the game state based on the establishment of the second condition can be notified, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even when two variable display games are varied simultaneously, it is possible to inform of a change in the game state based on the execution of each variable display game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, the control means executes a third specific effect for reporting a change in the game state due to the establishment of the second condition during a period from the end of the first specific effect to the change in the game condition due to the establishment of the second condition. It should be possible. Therefore, a change in the game state based on the establishment of the second condition can be notified, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In FIG. 92(a), a special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit in a specific game state is started.
When the special figure variation display game that won the drop lottery during the execution of the special figure variation display game is started and the normal game state ST1 is entered, and the special figure variation display game that wins the drop lottery An example of a case where the game ends before the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), in the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit is started (t121). Then, the special figure 2 variation display game in which the fall lottery was won during execution of this special figure 1 variation display game is started (t122). This special figure 2
With the start of the variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the game state changes to the normal game state S
becomes T1.

Since a certain time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the variable time for the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery, the game machine is set at the time when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery is started. It is possible to grasp which one ends first from the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game. Here, it is understood that the special figure 2 variation display game that wins the fall lottery ends with a loss result earlier than the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit.

After that, the special figure 2 variation display game that wins the falling lottery ends with a loss before the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit (t124), and a new special figure 2 variation display game is started. And with the end of the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game that will be a big hit,
The special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped with the result of losing (t125). After that, when the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special game state is started (t
126).

In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), either the effect state 1 or the effect state 2 can be executed. Rendering state 1 is a rendering as shown in FIG. First, in the fourth specific game state ST5, since the game progresses with the special figure 2 variation display game as the main variation, there is no change in the effect state at the time when the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit is started (t121). Game progresses. Then, when the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery starts (
t122), the first specific effect is started. The contents of this first specific effect are shown in FIGS.
As shown in e), the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight each other, and since the fall lottery is won here, the ally character 89a is finally defeated, the shutter display 93 is closed, and the fourth character is displayed. An effect to the effect that the specific game state ST5 ends is performed (t122
~ t124).

At a predetermined timing (t123) during the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game in which the fall lottery is won during the execution of the first specific effect, the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game to be a big hit is suggested or notified. A second specific effect for is added. The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game. The content of this second effect is to display a band 94 displaying "Warning!!" as shown in FIGS. 91(b) and (c).

After that, with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the drop lottery was won, the third specific effect is started (t124). The content of this third specific effect is, as shown in FIGS. 91(f) and (g), "
Waiting for the heat! ! ” is displayed. By setting the performance state 1 as described above, it is possible to suggest or inform the player that the player will win a big hit, and it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game due to winning the falling lottery.

Then, when the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit stops (t125), the decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a stops with the display corresponding to the result as shown in FIG. It is shown that Furthermore, during the stop display time (t125 to t126), the results are clearly displayed as shown in FIG. 91(i).

The display of the consecutive number display unit 96 is the end of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fall lottery was won (t12
4), the normal mode effect, which is the effect of the normal game state ST1 shown in FIG. 91(f), is temporarily terminated, but the first special game state shown in FIG. When it comes to the production, the display starts. Here, in the case where the special figure variation display game started before the end of the special figure variation display game winning the drop lottery becomes a big win, the number of big wins before the fall is once transferred to the normal game state ST1. , and is updated from 3 times before the fall to 4 times.

The performance state 2 is a performance in which the first specific performance for suggesting or notifying that the falling lottery has been won is not performed with respect to the performance state 1. - 特許庁FIG. 93 shows an example of this effect state 2. In FIG. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the game proceeds with the special figure 2 variation display game as the main variation, so at the time when the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit is started (t121 in FIG. 92 (a)), the figure 93 (
As shown in a), the game progresses without any change in the effect state.

After that, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery was started (Fig. 92 (a
) t122), as shown in FIG. 93(b), the game progresses without any change in the effect state, and when it comes to the predetermined timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t123 in FIG. 92(a)), FIG. (
As shown in c), a second specific effect is added to the first specific effect for suggesting or notifying execution of a special figure 1 variable display game that will result in a big hit, and is started. The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t124 in FIG. 92(a)). The contents of this second production are shown in FIG.
3(c) and 3(d), the effect is to display a band 94 displaying "Warning!!".

After that, with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the drop lottery was won, the third specific effect is started (t124 in FIG. 92(a)). The content of this third specific effect is, as shown in FIG. 93(e), a effect of displaying a band 95 displaying "Standby for extreme heat!". In addition, execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is suggested or notified according to the contents of the lines of the character 89a. By setting the effect state 2 as described above, it is possible to suggest or inform the player of the big win without making the player aware that the falling lottery has been won.

Then, when the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit stops (t125 in FIG. 92(a)), as shown in FIG. The special figure 1 game display section 88a stops with the display corresponding to the result, and the character 89a indicates that the big hit has been achieved. Furthermore, the stop display time (t125 to t126 in FIG. 92(a))
, the result mode is clearly displayed as shown in FIG. 93(g).

The display of the number of consecutive times display part 96 is maintained even after the special figure variation display game in which the falling lottery is won is finished, and when the first special game state is produced, the display starts to be updated by +1. In this case also, although the normal game state ST1 is temporarily entered, the number of big hits before falling is continued to be added, and the number of times of big hits is updated from 3 times before falling to 4 times.

That is, when the end condition is satisfied (winning the falling lottery) during the execution of one of the special figure fluctuation display games that is started during the specific period, and the other that is started before the start of the one fluctuation display game After the end condition is satisfied by the variable display game, the start condition for a new specific period is satisfied (
When the jackpot is derived), it is possible not to execute the ending effect (first specific effect). Also, in addition to the end effect or instead of the end effect, it is possible to execute specific effects (second specific effect, third specific effect).

In addition, the execution mode of the effect is not limited to the above-described one. As shown in (f), it is also possible to start the special figure variation display game in which the falling lottery is won, as the effect that shows the big hit.

In FIG. 92(b), a special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit in a specific game state is started.
When the special figure variation display game that wins the drop lottery during the execution of the special figure variation display game is started and falls to the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the special figure variation display game that will be a big hit An example of the case of ending first is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 92(b), in the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit is started (t131). Then, the special figure 2 variation display game in which the fall lottery was won during execution of this special figure 1 variation display game is started (t132). This special figure 2
With the start of the variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the game state changes to the normal game state S
becomes T1. At this time, it is understood that the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit ends before the special figure 2 variation display game that wins the fall lottery.

After that, the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game that will be a big hit is the special figure 2 that won the fall lottery.
The variation display game ends earlier than the variation time, and accordingly the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped as a result of losing (t133). After that, when the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special game state is started (t134).

In such a case, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the falling lottery was won, it is selected not to perform the first specific effect for suggesting or notifying that the falling lottery has been won.
As shown in (c), a second specific effect for suggesting or notifying execution of a special figure 1 variable display game that will result in a big hit is performed. By setting such an effect state, it is possible to suggest or inform the player of the big win without making the player aware that the falling lottery has been won.

Also in this example, a special figure variation display game that is a big hit is started in a state other than the normal game state ST1, but a special figure variation display game that wins a drop lottery during execution of the special figure variation display game is started. In the case of falling to the normal game state ST1 due to the falling lottery, the value of the consecutive number display section 96 continues to be added to the number of big wins before falling. It has become.

During the specific game state or special game state, which is a specific period, the game proceeds with right-handed strokes, and in the normal game state ST1, which is not a specific period, the game proceeds with left-handed strokes. The player can grasp whether or not. For this reason, the number of consecutive times display section 9
If the value of 6 is to be added to the number of hits before the fall, the shooting direction of the game ball at the present time is not clearly indicated, or the shooting direction in the specific game state is not indicated even during the period when the normal game state ST1 is entered. By showing it as it is, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the fall.

Also, in the above description, the takeover of the display of the continuous count display section 96 at the end of the specific period due to the end of the fourth specific game state ST5 was explained, but the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 and Similarly, at the end of the specific period due to the end of the third specific game state ST4, in a specific case where the condition for starting the specific period is immediately satisfied, the value of the consecutive number display section 96 may be inherited and added. good.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning port 97), and the result of the variable display game In a gaming machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and an effect control means ( Effect control device 300) and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36
, a normal variable prize winning device 37) and a second starting port (second starting winning port 97), and the game control means provides a first variable display as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port. A game is executed, a second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on winning of a game ball into a second starting port, the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and effect control is performed. The means can set a specific period that is started when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and accumulates and reports game information from the start to the end of the specific period. is possible, and if the end condition is satisfied during execution of one variable display game that started during a specific period, and the other variable display that started before the end of the one variable display game If the conditions for starting a new specific period are satisfied after the conditions for ending the game are satisfied, the specific period newly started based on the satisfaction of the conditions for starting is set at the start of the one variable display game. It is possible to accumulate game information subsequent to the game information accumulated in the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the accumulated game information from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, the game control means provides an end effect (first specific effect) for notifying that the end condition is satisfied.
can be executed, and the end condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the variable display games that is started during a specific period, and the other variable display game that is started before the start of the other variable display game Therefore, when the condition for starting a new specific period is established after the condition for ending is established, it is possible not to execute the end effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the accumulated game information from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, the game control means can execute an end effect for informing that the end condition is satisfied, and when the end condition is satisfied during execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period, If the condition for starting a new specific period is satisfied after the condition for ending is satisfied by the other variable display game that was started before the start of the one variable display game, in addition to the ending effect or instead of the ending effect. It means that it is possible to execute a specific production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the accumulated game information from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, if the end condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable display game started during the specific period, and if the start condition for the new specific period is satisfied as the variable display game being executed ends. In the specific period newly started at the end of the variable display game, the game information accumulated in the specific period set at the start of the variable display game can be accumulated subsequently. It should be possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the accumulated game information from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

[Third modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. Basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof are omitted, and different portions are mainly described. The game machine of this modified example differs in the transition of the game state and the execution mode of the effect. In addition, the case where the value before the fall is taken over for the display on the consecutive count display section 96 is different accordingly.

FIG. 94 shows the transition of the game state in this modified example. In this modification, as in the second modification, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and the special result is not derived 100 times of special figures. When the variable display game is executed, the game moves to the fourth specific game state ST5. The probability state and the like in each game state are the same as in the case of the second modification. Then, when the falling lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

Also, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3 and the fourth specific game state ST5
, the transition destination when the probability variable jackpot is derived is different from the second modification, and in this modification, the special game state is shifted to the fourth specific game state ST5 after the special game state, and when the normal jackpot is derived, the special game After the state, it shifts to the second specific game state ST3. That is, even if the variable probability big win is the same, the game state to be shifted is different between the case of being derived in the normal game state ST1 and the case of being derived in the specific game state, and the value obtained by the player is different.

Variation patterns selected in each game state in this modification are basically the same as in the case of the second variation, but part of the variation patterns selected in the fourth specific game state ST5 are different. Also, the mode of execution of the effect in this modified example is basically the same as in the case of the second modified example, but is partially different. In this modification, since the transition destination of the game state after that differs depending on the game state when the big win is derived, the player is allowed to clearly grasp the game state when the big win is derived, giving a sense of discomfort and distrust. should be avoided. For this reason, the execution mode of the effect is partially different from the case of the second modification. A case different from the second modified example will be described below.

FIG. 95 shows the variation pattern selected in the fourth specific game state ST5 of this modification. 95(a) to (c) are the same as in the case of the second modification. As shown in FIG. 95(d), for the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit, the special figure 1 is an irregular variation.
For the variable display game, 20000 ms is set when the fall lottery is not won, and 10000 ms is set when the fall lottery is won. In these cases, the specific effect that is set when the drop lottery is won when the result is a loss or a small hit is not set.

In addition, 10000 ms is set for the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation, regardless of whether the fall lottery is won or not. Of these, when the fall lottery is not won, the specific effect is set, and when the fall lottery is won, the specific effect is not set. The reason why the specific performance is not set for the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit when the fall lottery is won is that the normal mode performance is performed so that the player can grasp the fact that the fall lottery is won from an early stage.

FIG. 96(a) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit. Basically, it is the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 88(b), but in the case of the second modification shown in FIG. different from

When a new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the falling lottery is won, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t81), and the game state is the normal game state ST1. In addition, along with the start of the special figure variation display game that will be a big hit won in the fall lottery, the small hit RUSH production ends and the normal mode production is performed, and the big hit production in the normal mode production is executed (t81-).
t82).

By setting the normal mode effect in this way, it is possible to clearly show that the big win was derived in the normal game state ST1, and the player has doubts about the transition destination of the game state after the end of the special game state. can prevent you from having In addition, by shifting to the normal mode effect without executing the first specific effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from the normal one, and the expectation can be enhanced. Then, after the special figure variation display game is finished, the first special game state is set and the first special game effect is performed (t83).

In the consecutive times display section 96, since the end condition of the specific period is met with the shift to the normal game state ST1, the display is finished and the number of big wins is cleared to 0 (t81). after that,
Since the condition for starting a new specific period has been met with the end of the special figure variation display game that will result in a big hit, the display of the number of consecutive times display section 96 is started. In this case, since the game state when the big win is derived is the normal game state ST1, the value of the number of consecutive times display section 96 is set to 1, and the normal game state ST1 is set.
A player can grasp that it is a big hit derived in . Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp that the transition to the fourth specific game state ST5 is not made immediately after the end of the first special game state.

It should be noted that when the small hit RUSH effect is terminated and the normal mode effect is set, the result display at the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 91(d) may be performed. Furthermore, FIG. 91 (
Effects such as e) to (h) may be performed.

FIG. 96(b) shows a case where a fall lottery is won in a special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit, and a special figure variation display game in which a big win is started during execution of the special figure variation display game. The case is shown. Basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 89(b),
The display contents of the consecutive number display section 96 are different from those of the second modification shown in FIG. 89(b).

In the continuous number display part 96, the state of displaying the number of big hits (three times in this case) is maintained even in the second special game state after the special figure variation display game in which the drop lottery is won. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that wins the fall lottery, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this time. be. When the second special game state ends, the display ends and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t115).

After that, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that will be a big hit,
The display of the number of consecutive times display section 96 is started. In this case, since the game state when the big win is derived is the normal game state ST1 and a new specific period starts, the value of the number of consecutive times display section 96 is set to 1, and the big win derived in the normal game state ST1. A player can grasp something.
Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp that the transition to the fourth specific game state ST5 is not made immediately after the end of the first special game state.

In addition, the display device 41 is designed to perform an effect shown in FIG. 91, and upon completion of the second special game state, the effect is changed to the normal mode, so that the normal game state ST1 is entered. It becomes possible. In this example, the value of the number of consecutive times display section 96 in FIG. 91(i) is 1.

In addition, the execution time (t111 to t113) of the special figure fluctuation display game won in the fall lottery is
The variation time (t112
t113 and t115-t116). Therefore, when the special figure variation display game winning the fall lottery is started first or simultaneously, the special figure variation display game winning the fall lottery is always finished first. As a result, it is possible to secure time for informing the player of the normal game state ST1 before the result of the big win is derived, and the player can surely grasp the big win derived in the normal game state ST1. Is possible. again,
To simplify processing by determining performance contents without referring to fluctuation times of both special figure variation display games at least when a special figure variation display game winning a drop lottery is started first or at the same time.例文帳に追加can be done.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning port 97), and the result of the variable display game In a gaming machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and a first start opening ( First start winning mouth 36, normal variable winning device 37) and second starting mouth (second starting winning mouth 97
), wherein the game control means executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. A second variable display game is executed as a game, and the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed simultaneously, are started when a predetermined start condition is established, and are established when the variable display game is started. It is possible to set a specific period that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the game value given to the player differs depending on whether or not the special result is derived during the specific period, and the specific period ends. The execution time of the variable display game that satisfies the condition is shorter than the execution time of the variable display game that will be a special result that is not started during the specific period. therefore,
When the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is started after the variable display game in which the end condition is satisfied is started, the special result is derived after the specific period is over, so the game value to be obtained is determined by the player. It is possible to prevent discrepancies with recognition from occurring and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the game control means can execute an end effect (first specific effect) for informing that the end condition is satisfied during execution of the variable display game in which the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value to be obtained from being inconsistent with the player's perception, and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, although the start condition of the specific period can be satisfied along with the derivation of the special result, the time point at which the start condition is satisfied differs depending on which period is set as the target of the specific period. That is, when the special game state is included in addition to the specific game state as the specific period, the start condition is satisfied by the start of the special game state accompanying the derivation of the special result in a state other than the specific game state. . Also, if the specific period is only the specific game state and does not include the special game state, the special game state accompanying the derivation of the special result in the state that is not the specific game state ends and the specific game state is started. The condition is satisfied.

In FIG. 97(a), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit is started before the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery An example of the presentation state in the case where the special figure 1 variation display game in which the variation time is a big hit ends before the variation time is shown. Basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 92(a),
The presentation state and the display contents of the consecutive number display section 96 are different from those of the second modification shown in FIG. 92(a). Note that the rendering states 1 and 2 correspond to the rendering shown in FIG.
Main differences will be described below.

In the presentation state 1, the display of the number of consecutive times display section 96 is ended with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the falling lottery is won, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t124).
After that, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the number of consecutive times display part 96 is started. In this case, since the game state when the big win is derived is the normal game state ST1, the value of the number of consecutive times display section 96 is set to 1 so that the player can grasp that the big win is derived in the normal game state ST1. and

In addition, the display device 41 is designed to perform the production shown in FIG. 91, and when the special figure variation display game that wins the fall lottery ends, the normal mode production is performed, so the normal game state ST1 is entered. It becomes possible to grasp that In this example, the value of the consecutive count display section 96 in FIG. 91(i) is 1.

In the production state 2, (t
122), the small hit RUSH effect is completed, the normal mode effect is performed, and the second specific effect is executed. After the end of the special figure variation display game in which the falling lottery is won (t124), the third specific effect is performed until the end of the special figure variation display game (t126), and then the first special game state is entered. By setting the normal mode effect in this way, the derivation of the big hit is normal game state ST1
It is possible to clearly show what has been done in , and prevent the player from having doubts about the transition destination of the game state after the end of the special game state. In addition, by shifting to the normal mode effect without executing the first specific effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from the normal one, and the expectation can be enhanced.

In the consecutive times display section 96, the display is terminated with the transition to the normal game state ST1, and the number of big wins is cleared to 0 (t122). After that, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the number of consecutive times display part 96 is started. In this case, since the game state when the big win is derived is the normal game state ST1, the value of the number of consecutive times display section 96 is set to 1 so that the player can grasp that the big win is derived in the normal game state ST1. and In addition, when ending the small hit RUSH production and making it a normal mode production, FIG. 91 (d
) may be displayed at the end of the small hit RUSH effect. Furthermore, effects such as those shown in FIGS. 91(e) to (h) may be performed.

FIG. 97(b) shows an example of an effect state in the case where the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit ends earlier than the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game that wins the fall lottery. .
Basically the same as in the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 92(b), but in the case of the second modification shown in FIG. different from

With the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. At this time, it is understood that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit in the gaming machine ends earlier than the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game that wins the fall lottery. In this case, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the fall lottery was won, the normal mode production is performed, and it is selected not to perform the first specific production that suggests or informs that the fall lottery has been won. A special performance will be held.

In addition, in the continuous number display section 96, the display is ended with the transition to the normal game state ST1, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t132). After that, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the number of consecutive times display part 96 is started. In this case, since the game state when the big win is derived is the normal game state ST1, the value of the number of consecutive times display section 96 is set to 1 so that the player can grasp that the big win is derived in the normal game state ST1. and In addition, when ending the small hit RUSH production and making it a normal mode production,
A result display at the end of the small winning RUSH effect as shown in 1(d) may be performed.
Furthermore, effects such as those shown in FIGS. 91(e) to (h) may be performed.

In addition, if the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery is started within a predetermined period before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that will be a big hit, and the normal mode effect cannot be displayed for a sufficient time, the special figure that will be a big hit. It is also possible to notify that the player has won the fall lottery during the stop time of the variable diagram display game.

In addition, although the normal mode effect is used to show that the big win after winning the drop lottery is the big win in the normal game state ST1, the player can understand that the big win is in the normal game state ST1. It is not limited to the normal mode production as long as it makes it possible. For example, the normal game state ST1 may be indicated only by performing additional effects such as the second specific effect or the third specific effect without the normal mode effect, or the normal game state ST1 may be indicated by voice. You may make it show that it is. In addition, the position where the operable accessory stays in the specific game state differs from that in the normal game state ST1, and the accessory is returned to the position in the normal game state ST1 so that the accessory can be returned to the normal game state ST1. You may make it show that there is something.

In addition, during the specific game state or special game state, which is a specific period, the game is played with the right hand, and in the normal game state ST1, which is not the specific period, the game is played with the left hand. It is also possible to indicate that the game has returned to the normal game state ST1. In particular, in the case shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, when the normal game state ST1 is returned to, the instruction display for instructing a left-handed shot is emphasized and displayed, so that the player can recognize it more strongly.

In addition, although the takeover of the display of the continuous number display section 96 at the end of the specific period due to the end of the fourth specific game state ST5 has been described, the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state S
Likewise, at the end of the specific period due to the end of T3 and the third specific game state ST4, it may be possible to clearly indicate that the game state has shifted to the normal game state ST1. Furthermore, the variation time of the special figure variation display game in which the first specified game state ST2, the second specified game state ST3 and the third specified game state ST4 are ended is a big hit started in the normal game state ST1. It may be made to be shorter than the variation time of the special figure variation display game.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, it is determined whether or not to be in a high probability state by the pattern of the special result. It may be determined whether or not to set the high-probability state.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment, but may include other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

36 1st starting prize opening (starting prize opening, 1st starting prize opening)
37 normal variable winning device (starting winning opening, first starting opening)
97 2nd start prize mouth (start prize mouth, 2nd start prize mouth)
100 game control device (game control means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result,
A game control means for controlling a game;
A first start opening and a second start opening forming the start winning opening,
The game control means is
executing a first variable display game as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port;
executing a second variable display game as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port;
The first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed simultaneously,
It is possible to set a specific period that starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
After the end of the specific period, it transitions to a normal game state,
Execution that can be selected in the specific variation display game regardless of whether the specific variation display game, which is a variation display game in which the predetermined end condition is satisfied, is the first variation display game or the second variation display game. The time is shorter than the minimum selectable execution time in the first variable display game that starts when it is not the specific period and becomes the special result,
Further, when the specific variation display game is the first variation display game, the execution time selectable in the first variation display game is the second variation that is started when it is not the specific period and becomes the special result. A gaming machine characterized by being shorter than the minimum selectable execution time in a variable display game .

Images